280
® 300DLQWHQDQFH2UGHUV 5HOHDVH%

VeryGood PM Order

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: VeryGood PM Order

®

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

+(/3�30:

2&02

5HOHDVH �� ��%

Page 2: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

� -XQH�����

&RS\ULJKW© Copyright 1998 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this brochure may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose withoutthe express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed withoutprior notice.

SAP AG further does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics,links, or other items contained within these materials. SAP AG shall not be liable for any special,indirect, incidental, or consequential damages, including without limitation, lost revenues or lostprofits, which may result from the use of these materials. The information in this documentation issubject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of SAP AG forthe future.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL® and SQL-Server® are registered trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation.

IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®,AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

OSF/Motif® is a registered trademark of Open Software Foundation.

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation, California, USA.

INFORMIX®-OnLine IRU�6$3 is a registered trademark of Informix Software Incorporated.

UNIX® and X/Open® are registered trademarks of SCO Santa Cruz Operation.

ADABAS® is a registered trademark of Software AG.

SAP®, R/2®, R/3®, RIVA®, ABAP/4®, SAP ArchiveLink®, SAPaccess®, SAPmail®,SAPoffice®, SAP-EDI®, R/3 Retail®, SAP EarlyWatch®, SAP Business Workflow®, ALE/WEB,Team SAP, BAPI, Management Cockpit are registered or unregistered trademarks of SAPAG.

,FRQV

,FRQ 0HDQLQJ

Caution

Example

Note

Page 3: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

-XQH����� �

&RQWHQWV

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV������������������������������������������������������������������ �0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ�LQ�WKH�30�6\VWHP�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� �(OHPHQWV�RI�30�3URFHVVLQJ�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��0DLQ�6WHSV�LQ�30�3URFHVVLQJ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��7KH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��)XQFWLRQV�RI�WKH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��

Planning Functions ................................................................................................................... 15Processing Functions ............................................................................................................... 16Settlement Functions................................................................................................................ 17

&RQWHQWV��0DLQ�'DWD�*URXSV�LQ�WKH�30�2UGHU �������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��Header Data ............................................................................................................................. 19Location and Account Assignment Data .................................................................................. 20Object Data............................................................................................................................... 21Cost and Settlement Data ........................................................................................................ 22Operation Data ......................................................................................................................... 23Administrative Data and Control Parameters........................................................................... 24Default Values for the Order..................................................................................................... 25

&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ��7KH�:RUN�&HQWHU �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�IRU�D�30�1RWLILFDWLRQ�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��

Example of a PM Order for a Notification................................................................................. 32&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�'LUHFWO\�IURP�D�30�1RWLILFDWLRQ �������������������������������������������������������������� ��

Example of Creating an Order Directly From a Notification ..................................................... 34&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�:LWKRXW�)LUVW�&UHDWLQJ�D�1RWLILFDWLRQ ����������������������������������������������������� ��

Example of an Independent PM Order..................................................................................... 36&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�DQG�1RWLILFDWLRQ�7RJHWKHU ����������������������������������������������������������������������� ��&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�:LWK�D�'LIIHUHQW�30�3ODQQLQJ�3ODQW�������������������������������������������������������� ��

Example of a Different PM Planning Plant ............................................................................... 39&UHDWLQJ�D�&DOLEUDWLRQ�2UGHU������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��7KH�2EMHFW�/LVW����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��5XOHV�)RU�2EMHFW�/LVW������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��6HOHFWLQJ�WKH�2EMHFW�/LVW������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��(QWHULQJ�2EMHFWV�DQG�([LWLQJ�WKH�/LVW���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��3ODQQLQJ�LQ�WKH�30�2UGHU������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ��:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�:LWK�2SHUDWLRQV�DQG�6XE�2SHUDWLRQV��������������������������������������������������������� ��

Planning With Operations......................................................................................................... 50Planning With Sub-Operations ................................................................................................. 52Specifying an Assembly ........................................................................................................... 53Describing the Work Steps....................................................................................................... 54

Describing an Operation Using a Short Text ...................................................................... 55Describing an Operation Using a Long Text ....................................................................... 56Describing an Operation Using Standard Texts.................................................................. 57

Page 4: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

� -XQH�����

Assigning Work Centers ........................................................................................................... 58Qualification/Suitability ........................................................................................................ 59

Specifying Qualifications................................................................................................ 60Specifying Suitability ...................................................................................................... 61Example: Qualifications.................................................................................................. 62Example: Suitability........................................................................................................ 63

Specifying a Control Key .......................................................................................................... 64Specifying the Execution Factor............................................................................................... 65

Example: Execution Factor ................................................................................................. 67Entering Further Data ............................................................................................................... 68Implementing Capacity Planning and Capacity Leveling ......................................................... 69

Selecting Capacity Planning for Plant Maintenance ........................................................... 72Deallocating Individual Operation Splits.............................................................................. 73Splitting and Dispatching Individual Operation ................................................................... 74Splitting Several Operations at the Same Time and Dispatching Automatically................. 75

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�6XE�2UGHUV �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��Example: Sub-Orders ............................................................................................................... 77Creating a Sub-Order ............................................................................................................... 78Displaying Sub-Orders ............................................................................................................. 79

0DWHULDO�3ODQQLQJ ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��Assigning Stock Material .......................................................................................................... 82Assigning Non-Stock Material .................................................................................................. 83Assigning Raw Material ............................................................................................................ 85Assigning Text .......................................................................................................................... 86Deleting the Material Assigned................................................................................................. 87Displaying Assigned Materials ................................................................................................. 88Checking Material Availability................................................................................................... 89

3HUPLWV������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ��Example: Permits ..................................................................................................................... 91Assigning Permits..................................................................................................................... 92

Example: Permits in an Object Hierarchy ........................................................................... 93Example: Class Selection of Permits .................................................................................. 94Assigning Permits Manually ................................................................................................ 95

Issuing a Permit........................................................................................................................ 96Canceling an Issued Permit ..................................................................................................... 97

(VWLPDWLQJ�&RVWV ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��%XGJHW�0DQDJHPHQW ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ��(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWV �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Graphic: Estimating Costs for a PM Order ............................................................................. 102Requirements for Estimating Planned Costs.......................................................................... 103Estimating Planned Costs ...................................................................................................... 104Displaying Costs at Cost Element Level ................................................................................ 105Displaying Costs at Value Category Level ............................................................................. 106

6HWWOHPHQW�5XOH�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���Receiver Types....................................................................................................................... 108Defining the Settlement Rule.................................................................................................. 109Budget Control Using Parallel Project Account Assignment .................................................. 111

2SHUDWLRQ�1HWZRUNLQJ�8VLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���Types of Relationship ............................................................................................................. 114

Page 5: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

-XQH����� �

Relationship Time Intervals .................................................................................................... 116Creating Relationships ........................................................................................................... 117

Requirements for Creating Relationships ......................................................................... 118Creating Relationships Using the Graphics Function ....................................................... 119

Example: Creating Relationships Using the Graphics Function .................................. 121Creating Operations Using the Graphics Function ...................................................... 122

Creating Relationships Using the List Function ................................................................ 123Networking Several PM Orders Using Relationships........................................................ 124

Changing Relationships.......................................................................................................... 126Displaying Relationships ........................................................................................................ 127Deleting Relationships............................................................................................................ 128Carrying Out a Loop Analysis................................................................................................. 129

6FKHGXOLQJ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���Scheduling Requirements ...................................................................................................... 131Important Scheduling Data..................................................................................................... 132Maintaining Scheduling Data.................................................................................................. 133

Graphic: Overview of Scheduling Types ........................................................................... 135Example: Automatic Calculation of Execution Duration.................................................... 136Example: Entering the Execution Duration Manually........................................................ 137

Scheduling the PM Order ....................................................................................................... 138Scheduling a PM Order in the Header Data Screen or the Operation Overview.............. 139Scheduling a PM Order in the Structure Graphic.............................................................. 140Scheduling Networked PM Orders.................................................................................... 141

Copying Project Dates When Assigning a PM Order............................................................. 143Displaying Order Start/End Dates .......................................................................................... 145Displaying Operation Dates.................................................................................................... 146

5HYLVLRQ�$VVLJQPHQW ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���2WKHU�2UGHU�$VVLJQPHQWV��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���(QWU\�RI�3DUWQHU�'DWD����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Entering Partner Data............................................................................................................. 1502UGHU�5HOHDVH ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���5HOHDVLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���3XWWLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�LQ�3URFHVV ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���5HOHDVLQJ�$XWRPDWLFDOO\�&UHDWHG�2UGHUV�,PPHGLDWHO\���������������������������������������������������������� ���:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�7DVN�/LVWV �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���2UGHU�3ODQQLQJ�8VLQJ�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVN�/LVWV ���������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Selection Functions ................................................................................................................ 159Example: Operation Selection........................................................................................... 162Example: Work Center Selection ...................................................................................... 163Example: Renumbering..................................................................................................... 164Example: One-Time Complete Inclusion........................................................................... 165Example: Operation Sorting .............................................................................................. 166Example: Change of Work Center .................................................................................... 167

Setting Selection Functions.................................................................................................... 168Including a Task List Directly.................................................................................................. 169Selecting and Including an Object-Specific Task List ............................................................ 170Selecting and Including a General Maintenance Task List .................................................... 171Adapting a Task List ............................................................................................................... 173

Page 6: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

� -XQH�����

Displaying Included Maintenance Task Lists ......................................................................... 174:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�%LOOV�RI�0DWHULDO���2YHUYLHZ���������������������������������������������������������������� ���(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�%20�&RPSRQHQWV ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Effects of Assigning Stock Items ............................................................................................ 177Effects of Assigning Variable-Sized Items ............................................................................. 178Effects of Assigning Non-Stock Items .................................................................................... 179

Graphic: External Procurement Processing...................................................................... 180Effects of Assigning Text Items .............................................................................................. 181

8VLQJ�%LOOV�RI�0DWHULDO�LQ�2UGHU�3ODQQLQJ�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���Assigning Bill of Material Components................................................................................... 183Displaying Assigned BOM Components ................................................................................ 184

3URGXFWLRQ�5HVRXUFHV�DQG�7RROV��357����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���8VLQJ�3URGXFWLRQ�5HVRXUFHV�7RROV�LQ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU������������������������������������������������ ���

Assigning PRTs to an Operation ............................................................................................ 187Graphic: Assignment of PRTs to Order Operations.......................................................... 189

Deleting PRTs from an Operation .......................................................................................... 190Using Quantity Management for PRTs................................................................................... 191Scheduling PRTs.................................................................................................................... 192Checking the Availability of PRTs .......................................................................................... 193

Checking PRT Availability in the Operation ...................................................................... 194Checking PRT Availability for the Entire Maintenance Order ........................................... 195Checking PRT Availability Upon Order Release............................................................... 196

8VLQJ�6WDWXV�0DQDJHPHQW�:LWK�3URGXFWLRQ�5HVRXUFHV�7RROV��������������������������������������������� ���6KRS�3DSHUV������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���3ULQWLQJ�)D[LQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Printing Shop Papers According to System Settings ............................................................. 202Printing Shop Papers with Individual Settings........................................................................ 203Making Fax and/or Print Entries ............................................................................................. 204Printing Shop Papers for Individual Operations ..................................................................... 205Reprinting Shop Papers ......................................................................................................... 206Delta Printing .......................................................................................................................... 207Storing Shop Papers in ArchiveLink....................................................................................... 209Call Up Print Preview.............................................................................................................. 210Calling Up the Print Log.......................................................................................................... 211

'RZQORDGLQJ�2UGHUV ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���,VVXLQJ�DQG�3URFXULQJ�0DWHULDO ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���,VVXLQJ�3ODQQHG�6WRFN�0DWHULDO������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���,VVXLQJ�8QSODQQHG�6WRFN�0DWHULDO ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���([WHUQDO�3URFXUHPHQW�RI�1RQ�6WRFN�0DWHULDO ������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Creating Purchase Requisitions ............................................................................................. 217Changing Order Data Relevant to Purchase Orders.............................................................. 218

'LVSOD\LQJ�*RRGV�0RYHPHQW�IRU�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV���������������������������������������������������������� ���0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�&RPSOHWLRQ ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���7HFKQLFDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�&RPSOHWLRQ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���

Completing a Maintenance Order Technically ....................................................................... 223Resetting a Technical Completion.......................................................................................... 224

%XVLQHVV�&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU����������������������������������������������������������������������� ���Performing the Business Completion of a Maintenance Order .............................................. 226

6HWWLQJ�WKH�6WDWXV ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Page 7: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

-XQH����� �

6HWWOHPHQW���2YHUYLHZ ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���$OORFDWLQJ�&RVWV�LQ�WKH�30�6\VWHP ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���6HWWOHPHQW�5HFHLYHU�7\SHV������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���8VLQJ�D�3URILW�&HQWHU ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���6HWWOLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Settlement Example ............................................................................................................... 235([WHUQDO�$VVLJQPHQW�RI�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVNV �������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���5HSUHVHQWLQJ�([WHUQDO�&RPSDQLHV ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���$VVLJQLQJ�7DVNV�&RPSOHWHO\�RU�3DUWLDOO\ �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Assigning Individual Operations or Sub-Operations Externally.............................................. 240Assigning the Entire Order Externally .................................................................................... 242

5HSUHVHQWLQJ�([WHUQDO�6HUYLFHV����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���External Processing Data for an Operation............................................................................ 244Ordering External Services..................................................................................................... 245Confirming External Services ................................................................................................. 246Invoice Receipt and Debiting the Maintenance Order............................................................ 247Settling External Services....................................................................................................... 248

8VLQJ�7DVN�/LVWV�IRU�([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���6HOHFWLRQ�RI�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV�DQG�2SHUDWLRQV�8VLQJ�/LVWV��������������������������������������������� ���'LVSOD\LQJ�WKH�3RUWIROLR�*UDSKLF���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���'LVSOD\LQJ�WKH�6FKHGXOLQJ�2YHUYLHZ�*UDSKLF������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���([HFXWLQJ�2UGHU�)XQFWLRQV�LQ�WKH�/LVW ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�IRU�6HYHUDO�2UGHUV�LQ�WKH�/LVW ������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Creating a List and Selecting Orders ..................................................................................... 256Printing Shop Papers for Several Orders at Once ................................................................. 257

&UHDWLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�/LVW�IRU�(DFK�6HWWOHPHQW�5HFHLYHU������������������������������������������������������������ ���6WDWXV�0DQDJHPHQW���2YHUYLHZ ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���6\VWHP�6WDWXV ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���8VHU�6WDWXV��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Displaying Status Information and Allowed Operations ......................................................... 262Displaying a General Overview of Active Statuses ................................................................ 263

6XPPDU\�RI�WKH�0RVW�,PSRUWDQW�2UGHU�6WDWXVHV�������������������������������������������������������������������� ���(YDOXDWLQJ�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV���2YHUYLHZ ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���8VLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�/LVW����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���8VLQJ�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ�/LVW ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ ���'LVSOD\LQJ�DOO�WKH�0DWHULDOV�LQ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU ������������������������������������������������������������� ���$FWLRQ�/RJ�IRU�WKH�2UGHU ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���5HIXUELVKPHQW�RI�5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUHV�8VLQJ�5HIXUELVKPHQW�2UGHUV������������������������������������ ���5HIXUELVKPHQW�2UGHU����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUH ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���5HIXUELVKPHQW�RI�5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUHV �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� ���

Create Refurbishment Order .................................................................................................. 279

Page 8: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

� -XQH�����

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

Page 9: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ�LQ�WKH�30�6\VWHP

-XQH����� �

0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ�LQ�WKH�30�6\VWHPThe PM System supports the entire plant maintenance department in planning, processing andsettling maintenance tasks. You can enter, plan, monitor and report all the tasks to be carried outby the plant maintenance department. This includes both tasks that are not planned or that aredue to malfunction, and regular maintenance and inspection measures.

Maintenance processing (PM processing for short) in the PM System covers several levels whichneed not necessarily all be processed in full. Each company can determine its own maintenanceprocessing procedures according to its requirements.

Elements of PM Processing [Page 10]

Main Steps in PM Processing [Page 11]

Page 10: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(OHPHQWV�RI�30�3URFHVVLQJ

�� -XQH�����

(OHPHQWV�RI�30�3URFHVVLQJMaintenance processing for unplanned tasks consists of three essential elements:

• Maintenance notification

− Reports a malfunction at a technical object

− Requests maintenance tasks

− Describes the condition of a technical object

• Maintenance order

− Plans the execution of maintenance tasks

− Monitors the work progress

− Allocates the costs for the maintenance task

• Maintenance history

− Stores important PM data on a long-term basis

− Makes this data available for evaluations at all times

Page 11: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

0DLQ�6WHSV�LQ�30�3URFHVVLQJ

-XQH����� ��

0DLQ�6WHSV�LQ�30�3URFHVVLQJ

0DLQ�3URFHVVLQJ�6WHSV

The processing of unplanned maintenance tasks in the PM System can be subdivided into thefollowing steps:

1. Notification of a malfunction or a defect in a system or part of a system, in otherwords, a description of the system condition

2. Requesting a maintenance task

3. Creating a maintenance order and planning the task

4. Releasing the maintenance order

5. Executing the order

6. Completing the task and confirming that the order has been completed

7. Entering technical information such as findings, causes and downtimes

8. Completing the maintenance notification and the maintenance order, storing therelevant data for evaluations and for planning future maintenance activities

3ODQW 30�3ODQQLQJ 30�:RUNVKRSMalfunction, errorRequestActivity

- what- when- where

PM Notification

- technical information- breakdown

Requesting a

maintenance task

Create the orderPlanning the task- who- when, for how long- what steps- account assignment- resources

Technical information- breakdown- causes- objects affected- activities

PM History

order

Releasing theExecution

- material issue- procuring PRTs- work steps

Completion

Completionconfirmation

0DLQ�6WHSV�LQ�30�3URFHVVLQJ

:KLFK�6WHSV�'RHV�7KLV�'RFXPHQW�'HVFULEH"

Steps 1, 2 and 7 refer to the maintenance notification and are described in 30���0DLQWHQDQFH1RWLILFDWLRQV.

Steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 refer to the maintenance order and are described in this document.

Step 8 refers to the maintenance notification and the maintenance order, and is described in 30��0DLQWHQDQFH�1RWLILFDWLRQV for notifications and in this document for maintenance orders.

The maintenance history is described in the document 30���0DLQWHQDQFH�+LVWRU\.

Page 12: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

0DLQ�6WHSV�LQ�30�3URFHVVLQJ

�� -XQH�����

Regular maintenance tasks are described in detail in 30���0DLQWHQDQFH�3ODQQLQJ.

:KLFK�6WHSV�DUH�3HUIRUPHG�DQG�E\�:KRP"

The person or the department reponsible for carrying out these steps, and the level of detail ofthe data that has to be entered for the individual steps, varies depending on the organization ofyour company and in particular of your maintenance department.

Page 13: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

7KH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

-XQH����� ��

7KH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUIf, for example, a technical object malfunctions or is damaged, maintenance tasks may have tobe carried out to restore the ideal condition of the object.

You make the initial request for the necessary tasks using a maintenance notification.

However, to plan the necessary tasks in detail and to monitor their processing, you need to use amaintenance order. You can choose whether to refer the maintenance order to the relevantmaintenance notification or not.

Functions of the Maintenance Order [Page 14]

Completion of a Maintenance Order [Page 26]

Page 14: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

)XQFWLRQV�RI�WKH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

�� -XQH�����

)XQFWLRQV�RI�WKH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUIn the malfunction report, you describe the current condition of a technical object and outline themaintenance tasks required; in the maintenance order you can describe the repairs required ingreater detail.

The system provides a wide range of functions for planning, processing and settling the order:

• Planning Functions [Page 15]

• Processing Functions [Page 16]

• Settlement Functions [Page 17]

Page 15: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

3ODQQLQJ�)XQFWLRQV

-XQH����� ��

3ODQQLQJ�)XQFWLRQVThe following functions are available in the maintenance order to help you plan maintenancetasks. You can:

• Schedule the tasks for one or more technical objects.

• Describe the tasks to be carried out in detail.

• Specify which work centers are to carry out the tasks.

• Describe the individual operations which are to be carried out in detail and specify theplanned execution time and the number of persons involved.

• Plan materials, using object-specific bills of material if required.

• Specify the settlement rules.

• Include task lists in the PM order to assist in preparing the maintenance task.

• Plan the tasks to be carried out by your own employees or an external company.

Processing Functions [Page 16]

Settlement Functions [Page 17]

Page 16: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

3URFHVVLQJ�)XQFWLRQV

�� -XQH�����

3URFHVVLQJ�)XQFWLRQVThe following functions are available in the maintenance order to help you carry out themaintenance task and monitor the work. You can:

• Print shop papers for the maintenance order.

• Make planned or unplanned material withdrawals from the warehouse for the order.

• Enter confirmations which document the work progress.

Planning Functions [Page 15]

Settlement Functions [Page 17]

Page 17: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HWWOHPHQW�)XQFWLRQV

-XQH����� ��

6HWWOHPHQW�)XQFWLRQVYou can settle the costs resulting from a maintenance task in one of the following five ways:

• To a cost center

• To a fixed asset

• To a project

• To another order

• To a G/L account

Planning Functions [Page 15]

Processing Functions [Page 16]

Page 18: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&RQWHQWV��0DLQ�'DWD�*URXSV�LQ�WKH�30�2UGHU

�� -XQH�����

&RQWHQWV��0DLQ�'DWD�*URXSV�LQ�WKH�30�2UGHU

+HDGHU�'DWD�>3DJH���@

/RFDWLRQ�DQG�$FFRXQW�$VVLJQPHQW�'DWD�>3DJH���@

2EMHFW�'DWD�>3DJH���@

&RVW�DQG�6HWWOHPHQW�'DWD�>3DJH���@

2SHUDWLRQ�'DWD�>3DJH���@

$GPLQLVWUDWLYH�'DWD�DQG�&RQWURO�3DUDPHWHUV�>3DJH���@

'HIDXOW�9DOXHV�IRU�WKH�2UGHU�>3DJH���@

Page 19: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

+HDGHU�'DWD

-XQH����� ��

+HDGHU�'DWDHeader data is information which is used to identify and manage the maintenance order andapplies to the whole order. Header data is contained in the header of every maintenance orderand comprises:

• Number, description and type of order

• Assignment to a main work center and, where necessary, to a person responsible forthe order

• Schedule dates for order execution, priority of the task, allocation to a revision

• Reference object (see object data [Page 21].)

• Administrative data

− Name of the person who created and last changed the maintenance order

− Dates the order was created and last changed

• Maintenance activity type

• Regular maintenance data

The order header also contains additional data, including the following:

• Special allocations valid for the maintenance order (for example, company code,allocation group, profit center and WBS element)

• Dates (start/end dates, scheduled dates and actual dates)

• Notification number, if the maintenance order was created with reference to anotification

On the central header data screen, you will also find the first order operation.

A customer enhancement is available for the order header:

You can make customer-specific enhancements in the table of order headersusing the customer enhancement IWO10018. The new fields can be maintainedon their own screen.

Before you use the enhancement, read the corresponding documentation.To do this, from the initial SAP screen, choose 7RROV�→�$%$3�:RUNEHQFK�→8WLOLWLHV�→�(QKDQFHPHQWV�→�'HILQLWLRQ.Enter the name of the enhancement.Then select 'RFXPHQWDWLRQ and choose 'LVSOD\.

Page 20: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

/RFDWLRQ�DQG�$FFRXQW�$VVLJQPHQW�'DWD

�� -XQH�����

/RFDWLRQ�DQG�$FFRXQW�$VVLJQPHQW�'DWDThe system copies the location data and the default account assignment from the master recordof the reference object; this is valid for the entire maintenance order:

'DWD &RQWHQWV

Location data This describes where the functional location or the equipment issited within the company.

Account assignment data This specifies the account to which the maintenance costs arenormally to be debited. It is proposed from the master record ofthe reference object and can be changed when you maintainthe first settlement rule for the order.

Page 21: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

2EMHFW�'DWD

-XQH����� ��

2EMHFW�'DWDAs a rule, a maintenance order refers to one or more objects, where the term "object" can meanthe following:

2EMHFWV 'HVFULSWLRQ

Functional locations

Equipment

Assemblies

Material (if necessary, with serialnumber)

You enter these in the order header as referenceobjects and/or in the object list.

You can display further information on the referenceobject for a maintenance order (for example, existingmaintenance notifications or orders for the object,inclusion in an object structure or object network andso on) using object information.

To do this, in the header data screen, select ([WUDV→�5HI�REMHFW�→�2EMHFW�LQIRUPDWLRQ.

Maintenance notifications You enter notifications in the object list. If thenotifications refer to functional locations, equipment,assemblies or materials, then these objects appear inthe list in addition to the notification number.

A notification appears automatically in the object listand on the order header if the order has beencreated with reference to it.

Objects without master record In this case you do not enter any of the objects listedabove. Instead, you must maintain location andaccount assignment data for the order manually.

You create a maintenance order for sweeping a hall.No technical object master record has been createdin the system for the hall.

6HH�DOVR�

The Object List [Page 43]

Page 22: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&RVW�DQG�6HWWOHPHQW�'DWD

�� -XQH�����

&RVW�DQG�6HWWOHPHQW�'DWDThis data tells you:

• The planned and actual costs in the value categories for this order

• Whether the costs are to be settled to a cost center, an asset, an order or a project

• Which cost elements are relevant for the order

• Which key figures from the Plant Maintenance Information System are updated usingthe value categories, and how these key figures are updated by the actual order costs

Page 23: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

2SHUDWLRQ�'DWD

-XQH����� ��

2SHUDWLRQ�'DWD

2YHUYLHZ

Using operations, you describe the work to be done when carrying out the maintenance order.

Operations can be subdivided into sub-operations.

Operation data can be subdivided into the following three groups:

• Data contained in both operations and sub-operations

• Data contained only in operations

• Data contained only in sub-operations

'DWD�&RQWDLQHG�LQ�2SHUDWLRQV�DQG�6XE�2SHUDWLRQV

The following data is contained in both operations and sub-operations:

• General data

This includes, for example, a description of the work to be carried out, the work centerthat is to carry out the work and the operating condition of the object while the work isbeing carried out.

• Standard values

This includes data that refers to the type of work to be carried out, the amount of workand the time required.

• Wage data

This data refers to the qualifications required of the persons carrying out the work andtheir wages.

• External processing data

This data is specified if an operation is to be carried out by an external company.

'DWD�&RQWDLQHG�2QO\�LQ�2SHUDWLRQV

Operations contain data relevant to scheduling. This includes:

• The length of the operation

• Date restrictions

'DWD�&RQWDLQHG�2QO\�LQ�6XE�2SHUDWLRQV

Since sub-operations are not scheduled using the scheduling function, they only contain theintervals for the tasks they describe relative to the start and end dates of the operation to whichthey belong.

Page 24: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$GPLQLVWUDWLYH�'DWD�DQG�&RQWURO�3DUDPHWHUV

�� -XQH�����

$GPLQLVWUDWLYH�'DWD�DQG�&RQWURO�3DUDPHWHUVThe administrative data and control parameters of a maintenance order contain the followinginformation:

'DWD &RQWHQWV

Administrative data This indicates when the maintenance order was created and changedand by whom.

This data is entered automatically by the system and cannot bechanged.

Profiles These propose certain order data:• When using external materials• When processing operations externally• During processing (for example, key word ID,����calculation key, relationship view)

Parameters This involves data that is either determined or proposed on the basisof the order type you selected. It concerns, for example, costing, userstatus and settlement.

You can specify the data in the order yourself for certain parameters,or change the default values.

Planning indicator This indicates whether the order is planned, unplanned or a rushorder. This indicator is important for later order evaluations.

This indicator is proposed automatically by the system, depending onthe order type. You can change it if necessary.

Administrative data and control parameters are displayed on a separate screen in the order. Youcall it up with +HDGHU → $GPLQ'DWD�3DUDPHWHUV.

Page 25: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'HIDXOW�9DOXHV�IRU�WKH�2UGHU

-XQH����� ��

'HIDXOW�9DOXHV�IRU�WKH�2UGHU

8VHYou use this function to:

• Prespecify certain constant data as default values for the order you are creating

• Set certain user-specific process flows in the system

This makes it easier to enter the data and accelerates the implementation of the order entry.

)HDWXUHVYou can define define default values in the system for the following data groups and functionalprocess flows:

• General default values

This relates to data which should be provided as default values for fields that involveprocessing and organization.

• Data for the reference object

This relates to data which should be provided as default values for field that involvethe order reference object. Here you can also define which view of the referenceobject should be provided on the initial screen of the order.

• Control data

Here you can define which system process flows should be valid if you:

− Put the order in process

− Maintain the settlement rule for the order

− Copy the task lists into the order

• External processing data

This relates to data which should be provided as default values for fields that involveexternal service and procurement options.

• External procurement

This relates to data which should be provided as default values for fields that involvepurchasing data.

• Sales data

In the standard system, this tab page is only provided for service orders.

This relates to data which should be provided as default values for fields whichinvolve the sales organization.

$FWLYLWLHVTo select the tab page for the default values in the order, choose ([WUDV�→�6HWWLQJV�→�'HIDXOWYDOXHV.

Page 26: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

�� -XQH�����

&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUYou can create a maintenance order in response to one or more maintenance notifications. Youcan also subsequently create a maintenance notification for a maintenance order that wascreated directly, for example, in order to enter machine breakdown data or system availabilitydata with reference to the work carried out at particular objects.

Both the maintenance notification and the maintenance order are completed, once the repairsthat were requested have been carried out. There are two completion procedures:

• 7HFKQLFDO completion

For information on this, refer to Technical Maintenance Order Completion [Page 221]

• %XVLQHVV completion

For information on this, refer to Business Completion of a Maintenance Order [Page225]

Page 27: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

7KH�:RUN�&HQWHU

-XQH����� ��

7KH�:RUN�&HQWHU

:KDW�LV�D�ZRUN�FHQWHU"

Work centers in plant maintenance or service management generally involve groups of craftsmenwith a specific qualification. For example, there can be the following work centers for plantmaintenance or service management in a company:

:RUN�FHQWHU $PRXQW�RI�ODERU

Mechanics 1 4

Mechanics 2 4

Electronics 2

Machine center 2

,QGLYLGXDO�FDSDFLW\�PDLQWHQDQFH�IRU�WKH�SODQW�PDLQWHQDQFH�ZRUN�FHQWHU

If you manage the individual employees in your company using the SAP human resourcessystem you can specify, for every work center, which individual capacities, that is people, workthere.

30�:RUN�FHQWHU (PSOR\HHV

Mechanics 1 John SearleMary MidgelyDonald DavidsonElizabeth Anscombe

Mechanics 2 Janet Radcliffe-RichardsRobert NozickJudith Jarvis-ThompsonJohn Rawls

5HTXLUHPHQWV�SURILOHV�DQG�TXDOLILFDWLRQV�IRU�WKH�ZRUN�FHQWHU

You can enter requirements profiles and qualifications for every work center in plant maintenanceand service management:

:RUN�FHQWHU 5HTPWV�TXDOLILFDWLRQV

Mechanics 1 Welding exam

Page 28: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

7KH�:RUN�&HQWHU

�� -XQH�����

Mechanics 2 Welding course

If an employee with particular qualifications is required in an operation for a plant maintenanceorder, then the qualifications from the work center and the operation are combined to form anoverall qualification. The qualification of the individual employee at the work center is comparedto this overall qualification. The suitability of the employee depends upon how well thequalification of the individual employee matches up to the overall qualification.

An employee who has passed a welding exam is required for an operation in aplant maintenance order.

However, for the work center “Mechanics 2” to which an operation has been dispatched, only thequalification “welding course” is valid. Since none of the employees at the work center“Mechanics 2” has passed a welding exam, each of them only has a suitability level of 60% forthe operation to be processed.

Page 29: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU

-XQH����� ��

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU

8VHYou can use this function to create maintenance orders in different ways in the system.

3UHUHTXLVLWHVThe different options are only available if the necessary settings are made in the Customizing ofPlant Maintenance.

)HDWXUHV1. You create an order for a maintenance notification in order to plan the maintenance

tasks requested.

This procedure is advisable if maintenance tasks have been requested for a technicalobject in a maintenance notification. If the maintenance planner determines that thetasks requested should be planned and performed using a maintenance order, theycreate a maintenance order for the notification. The reference object specified in themaintenance notification automatically becomes the reference object of the order(Example [Page 32]).

See Creating a PM Order for a PM Notification [Page 31].

2. You create an order directly from a maintenance notification.

This procedure is advisable in particularly urgent cases, in which you want to proceedimmediately with planning the maintenance tasks necessary (Example [Page 34]).

See Creating a PM Order Directly from a PM Notification [Page 33].

If you create an order from a notification or subsequently for a notification, theorder copies certain data (for example, work center, text, objects, dates) from thenotification.

3. You create an order directly as an independent order, without first creating a PMnotification.

This procedure is intended for persons who are authorized to create a maintenanceorder directly and to plan the required maintenance tasks without first issuing amalfunction report (Example [Page 36]).

See Creating a PM Order Without First Creating a Notification [Page 35].

Within the maintenance order, the person entering the data has the option ofcreatiing a maintenance notification for this order at a later date, in order, forexample, to enter a damage description or a machine breakdown report.

4. You create an order and a notification together

Page 30: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU

�� -XQH�����

This procedure is intended for persons who are authorized to create a maintenanceorder directly and want to enter an order and certain notification data (malfunctiondata, damage and notification dates) in one single work step.

See Creating a PM Order and Notification Together [Page 37]

5. You create an order for a planning plant which does not correspond to the one in themaster record of the reference object.

The maintenance planning plant responsible for planning the maintenance tasks for atechnical object is indicated in the master record of the technical object. When youcreate a maintenance order for the technical object, the system automatically entersthe PM planning plant indicated in the master record in the maintenance order. Incertain cases, however, you may need to enter a different planning plant for aparticular technical object contained in an order (Example [Page 39]).

See Creating a PM Order With a Different PM Planning Plant [Page 38].

6. You create an order automatically from a maintenance plan.

In regular maintenance, for which you use maintenance plans, maintenance ordersare generated automatically from scheduled maintenance plans at regular intervals.

For information on how to create maintenance orders automatically from maintenanceplans, see the SAP document 30����0DLQWHQDQFH�3ODQQLQJ.

7. You create a calibration order.

This can relate to an order generated for calibration inspection from a maintenanceplan or an order created directly for a calibration inspection.

See Creating a Calibration Order [Page 40]

For more information about calibration inspection, see the SAP document 40��4XDOLW\�0DQDJHPHQW.

You FDQQRW remove the link between the PM notification and PM order in thefollowing cases:

• When the maintenance order was created directly from the maintenancenotification

• When the maintenance order is completed

• When the notification is entered in the order header

Page 31: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�IRU�D�30�1RWLILFDWLRQ

-XQH����� ��

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�IRU�D�30�1RWLILFDWLRQ1. In the initial SAP screen, choose /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFH

SURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → &UHDWH�QRWLILFDWLRQ.

You reach the screen &UHDWH�30�2UGHU�I�1RWLILFDWLRQ��,QLWLDO�6FUHHQ.

2. Enter the order type and number of the maintenance notification for which you want tocreate an order and choose &RQWLQXH.

You reach the header data screen for the new maintenance order. The system hasalready entered the reference object of the maintenance notification as the referenceobject of the maintenance order and copied other data such as the text, maintenanceplanner group and start/end dates.

3. Enter any further relevant data and check the data copied from the notification.

4. Save the maintenance order.

To find out how to return to the maintenance notification from the maintenance order, seeAccessing a Maintenance Notification From an Order.

You can navigate as required between the order and notification. To do this, youcan use the pushbuttons 1RWLILFDWLRQ and 2UGHU.

Only when you save the order or notification, is:

• The order saved together with the notification

• The link between the notification and order saved

Page 32: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�IRU�D�30�1RWLILFDWLRQ

�� -XQH�����

([DPSOH�RI�D�30�2UGHU�IRU�D�1RWLILFDWLRQAn employee in production reports damage to equipment 100001234 by entering a malfunctionreport in the system. The maintenance planner decides to plan and carry out the repairs using amaintenance order and creates a maintenance order for the notification.

In the course of planning, the maintenance planner allocates three further malfunction reportswhich include requests for similar tasks to the maintenance order. Equipment 100001234 fromthe first maintenance notification remains the reference object in the maintenance order. Theobject list contains the first maintenance notification for which the maintenance order wascreated, as well as the three further maintenance notifications which were subsequently allocatedto the maintenance order.

Page 33: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�'LUHFWO\�IURP�D�30�1RWLILFDWLRQ

-XQH����� ��

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�'LUHFWO\�IURP�D�30�1RWLILFDWLRQ1. To create a PM notification, choose /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH�→�0DLQWHQDQFH

SURFHVVLQJ in the initial screen and then choose the required maintenance notificationtype to create a maintenance notification under 1RWLILFDWLRQV.

2. Complete the screens of the maintenance notification as described in 30 -0DLQWHQDQFH�1RWLILFDWLRQV.

3. You now have the following options:

− &UHDWLQJ�WKH�RUGHU�IURP�WKH�QRWLILFDWLRQ

In the unsaved PM notification or in the saved notification, choose 1RWLILFDWLRQ →)XQFWLRQV → 2UGHU → &UHDWH.

Complete the dialog box as required and choose &RQWLQXH�

The system saves the maintenance notification and creates a maintenance orderfor it. The system copies the reference object of the notification as the referenceobject of the order as well as other data, for example, text, maintenance plannergroup and start/end dates. The system informs you of the order number in anonline message. You can now select it in change mode and start the orderplanning. To find out how to do this, see Planning in the PM Order [Page 48].

− &UHDWLQJ�DQG�LPPHGLDWHO\�SURFHVVLQJ�WKH�RUGHU�IURP�WKH�QRWLILFDWLRQ

In the unsaved PM notification or in the saved notification, choose 1RWLILFDWLRQ →)XQFWLRQV → 2UGHU�→�&UHDWH�QRWLILFDWLRQ.

Complete the dialog box as required and choose &RQWLQXH�

You reach the header data screen of the new maintenance order. The systemhas already entered the reference object of the notification as the referenceobject of the order as well as copied other data, for example, text, maintenanceplanner group and start/end dates. You can now start your order planning. To findout how to do this, see Planning in the PM Order - Overview [Page 48].

You can navigate as required between the order and notification. To do this, youcan use the pushbuttons 1RWLILFDWLRQ and 2UGHU.

Only when you save the order or notification, is:

• The order saved together with the (if applicable, still unsaved) notification

• The link between the notification and the order saved

• The number of the notification entered in the order header, if the notificationhad not been saved first

Page 34: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�'LUHFWO\�IURP�D�30�1RWLILFDWLRQ

�� -XQH�����

([DPSOH�RI�&UHDWLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�'LUHFWO\�)URP�D�1RWLILFDWLRQThe maintenance planner responsible checks the newly-created PM notifications outstanding inthe system. A maintenance task needs to be planned and carried out immediately for one of thenotifications. The maintenance planner therefore creates a maintenance order directly from themaintenance notification selected.

Page 35: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�:LWKRXW�)LUVW�&UHDWLQJ�D�1RWLILFDWLRQ

-XQH����� ��

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�:LWKRXW�)LUVW�&UHDWLQJ�D1RWLILFDWLRQ

1. In the initial SAP screen, choose /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFHSURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → &UHDWH�

You reach the screen &UHDWH�30�2UGHU��,QLWLDO�6FUHHQ�

2. Complete the screen according to your requirements. Note that you have the optionof entering a reference order and changing the view of the reference object.

5HIHUHQFH�RUGHU

You can also enter another order on the initial screen, which you want to use as areference for the new ordere. The system copies the planning data for operations,material components, production resources/tools and external services from thereference order as default values for the new order.

You cannot use historical orders as a reference.

9LHZ�RI�WKH�UHIHUHQFH�REMHFW

– To display each business process appropriately, you can set the view of thereference object in the initial SAP screen by choosing ([WUDV → 6HWWLQJV�→5HIHUHQFH�REMHFW�YLHZ. In the standard system, different versions are available,for example:

– Functional location, equipment and assembly

– Material number and serial number

– Equipment

– Without reference object

3. Press ENTER.

You see the screen &UHDWH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU��&HQWUDO�+HDGHU.

4. If you entered a specific object for the new maintenance order, for example, afunctional location or piece of equipment, this is the reference object of the newmaintenance order. The system completes some of the header data fields with datafrom the object master record. Check the data and complete any other relevant fields.

5. If you need more lines for the description than are available in the short text, call upthe long text editor with +HDGHU → /RQJ�WH[W.

You reach the text editor screen, where you can enter a long text for the orderheader. Save the long text and return to the header data screen with *RWR → %DFN.

6. Save the maintenance order.

Page 36: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�:LWKRXW�)LUVW�&UHDWLQJ�D�1RWLILFDWLRQ

�� -XQH�����

([DPSOH�RI�DQ�,QGHSHQGHQW�30�2UGHUAn employee discovers some damage at a piece of equipment when a maintenance planner ispresent. The maintenance planner does not enter a malfunction report in the system, but insteadimmediately creates a maintenance order to plan the repair.

Page 37: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�DQG�1RWLILFDWLRQ�7RJHWKHU

-XQH����� ��

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�DQG�1RWLILFDWLRQ�7RJHWKHU

3UHUHTXLVLWHVIn the Customizing of Plant Maintenance, you must have defined the following for an order type:

• That notification data can be entered on the header data screen of the order

• The type of notification that should be created in this case

3URFHGXUH1. Choose /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV →

&UHDWH��JHQHUDO��in the initial SAP screen.

You reach the screen &UHDWH�30�2UGHU��,QLWLDO�6FUHHQ�

2. Enter an order type for which it has been defined in Customizing that notification datacan be entered on the header data screen of the order.

3. Complete the screen according to your requirements, and proceed with the creationof the order as described in Creating a PM Order Without First Creating a Notification[Page 35].

4. Enter the required notification data on the header data screen of the order.

5. Save the order.

The system saves the orderand automatically creates a notification for the orderbased on the data entered and the valid Customizing settings. The number of thenotification is contained in the order header.

Page 38: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�:LWK�D�'LIIHUHQW�30�3ODQQLQJ�3ODQW

�� -XQH�����

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�:LWK�D�'LIIHUHQW�30�3ODQQLQJ�3ODQW1. In the initial SAP screen, choose /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFH

SURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → &UHDWH��JHQHUDO�.

You reach the screen &UHDWH�30�2UGHU��,QLWLDO�6FUHHQ�

2. Complete the screen according to your requirements. Enter also the requiredtechnical object that represents the reference object.

3. Enter the number of the different planning plant in the field 3ODQQLQJ�SODQW.

4. Press ENTER.

The system displays a dialog box, asking you to select either the PM planning plantentered in the master record of the technical object, or the one you just entered.

You FDQQRW change the PM planning plant that you now choose for the PM order.

5. Select the correct planning plant.

You see the screen &UHDWH�30�2UGHU��&HQWUDO�+HDGHU.

6. Complete the relevant fields in the header data screen.

If you need more lines for the description than are available in the short text, call upthe long text editor with +HDGHU → /RQJ�WH[W.

This takes you to the text editor screen, where you can create a long text for the orderheader. Save the long text and return to the header data screen with *RWR → %DFN.

7. Save the PM order.

Page 39: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�:LWK�D�'LIIHUHQW�30�3ODQQLQJ�3ODQW

-XQH����� ��

([DPSOH�RI�D�'LIIHUHQW�30�3ODQQLQJ�3ODQWAn aircraft needs to be repaired. It is assigned to PM planning plant 0001 (Frankfurt Airport) in itsmaster record. However, the repair needs to be carried out in Great Britain. The plant responsiblefor planning there is PM planning plant 0002 (Heathrow Airport). The maintenance plannershould therefore enter the different PM planning plant 0002 in the maintenance order for theaircraft.

Page 40: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�D�&DOLEUDWLRQ�2UGHU

�� -XQH�����

&UHDWLQJ�D�&DOLEUDWLRQ�2UGHU

8VHYou create a calibration order if you want to check the accuracy of a piece of test equipment or atechnical object.

• If you want to do this regularly, you use a maintenance plan which regularly createscalibration orders.

To ensure that a caliper gauge measures exactly, you create it as a piece ofequipment and create a maintenance plan for it which regularly createscalibration orders for the caliper gauge.

• If you do not want to do it regularly (= spontaneously), you create a calibration orderdirectly.

You determine that a caliper gauge is no longer measuring exactly. It must berecalibrated. For this, you use a calibration order.

,QWHJUDWLRQThe calibration inspection combines functions from the application components PM (PlantMaintenance) and QM (Quality Management).

3UHUHTXLVLWHV• You must define an internal order type for calibration orders in your system using the

Customizing function.

In the standard system, the order type 30�� (calibration order) is used for this.

• The equipment, for which you want to create a calibration order, must be created as apiece of test equipment. To do this, you must define a special equipment category fortest equipment in your system using the Customizing function.

In the standard system, the equipment category 4 (test equipment) is used for this.

• If you want to update the measurement documents as an automatic follow-up actionfor the inspection lot:

− The characteristic entered in the measuring point/counter must have beencreated using the classification system

− The measuring point/counter and the master characteristic must both be createdwith reference to the same general characteristic of the classification system

• Using the Customizing functions for Quality Management, you must continue tocreate the following prerequisites in your system:

− An inspection type for Plant Maintenance must be defined. This inspection typemust be created for origin �� (Plant Maintenance).

Page 41: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�D�&DOLEUDWLRQ�2UGHU

-XQH����� ��

In the standard system, inspection type 14 (inspection for Plant Maintenance) isused for this.

The inspection type must be assigned to the order type for calibration orders(order type 30�� in the standard system) using the Customizing functions.

− An inspection point from the category (TXLSPHQW must be defined.

)HDWXUHV

2UGHU�&UHDWLRQ

A calibration order can be created in two different ways:

• Automatically using a preventive maintenance plan (calibration plan)

You use a preventive maintenance plan to control how often the accuracy of a pieceof calibration equipment or technical object should be checked. If the preventivemaintenance plan is due, the system automatically creates a maintenance order(calibration order).

• By direct input

For this, you use the functions for creating a PM order.

,QVSHFWLRQ�/RW�&UHDWLRQ

When the maintenance order is created, the system creates an inspection lot. The inspection lotappears in the worklist of the results recording for Quality Management.

5HVXOWV�5HFRUGLQJ

The results recording and usage decision for the test equipment is performed using the QualityManagement functions.

(QKDQFHG�0HDVXUHG�9DOXH�)XQFWLRQV

Calibration inspection makes available an enhanced measured value function with which you canmonitor created test and measurement equipment as equipment.

Th objective is to enter inspection results in addition to maintenance or calibration. You can alsouse the measurement readings and counters in Plant Maintenance to enter the values, butprocessing from Quality Management using inspection characteristics offers additional functionsfor planning and measurement results. You can, for example:

• Enter limiting values for upper and lower tolerances

• Perform classified results recording

• Confirm multiple measurements for a characteristic

• Specify samples

• Enter control charts

'HILQLWLRQ�RI�)ROORZ�8S�$FWLRQV

When the usage decisions are made, automatic follow-up actions are performed, for example,status change of the test equipment (“Ready for use” → “Not ready for use”) or updatingmeasured values.

For more information about maintenance planning, see PM - Maintenance Planning [Ext.]�

Page 42: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�D�&DOLEUDWLRQ�2UGHU

�� -XQH�����

For more information about calibration inspection and Quality Management, see Test EquipmentManagement [Ext.].

Page 43: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

7KH�2EMHFW�/LVW

-XQH����� ��

7KH�2EMHFW�/LVW

'HILQLWLRQA list od objects (pieces of equipment, functional locations, notifications, materials with serialnumbers) which are assigned to a maintenance notification, a maintenance order or amaintenance item.

8VHThe object list is a central part of the maintenance order. You use it to assign technical objectsand/or maintenance notifications to the maintenance order.

When you make entries in the object list for a maintenance order, you are linking it to thetechnical objects and/or maintenance notifications you enter. The maintenance order is valid forany reference object you have entered in the header data screen, as well as further objects andmaintenance notifications you entered in the object list.

Even if no reference object has been entered for the maintenance order in theheader data screen, you can still assign technical objects and/or maintenancenotifications to the maintenance order in the object list.

6WUXFWXUHThere are two features of the object list:

1. An object list, in which you can enter technical objects (pieces of equipment,functional locations, assemblies) and notifications

2. An object list, in which you can enter objects, which are identified by a combination ofmaterial and serial numbers, and notifications.

Which of these two versions is used in the order, depends on:

• The choice of reference object in the notification/order

• The view setting for the section 5HIHUHQFH�REMHFW in the notification/order

If you create the maintenance order with reference to a maintenance notification which has areference object, the system copies the reference object from the maintenance notification to theorder and enters the notification number in the object list. You can assign further technicalobjects and/or maintenance notifications to the order in the object list.

6HH�DOVR�

Rules For Object List [Page 44]

Selecting the Object List [Page 46]

Entering Objects and Exiting the List [Page 47]

Page 44: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5XOHV�)RU�2EMHFW�/LVW

�� -XQH�����

5XOHV�)RU�2EMHFW�/LVW

8VHYou must observe these rules if you want to:

• Make entries in the object list

• Process entries in the object list

)HDWXUHV

,I�\RX��� 7KHQ���

Enter a PM notification The system displays the reference object of the PMnotification in the other fields of the list block. If this is apiece of equipment, the functional location at which it isinstalled is also displayed. You cannot make entries in thesefields.

Enter a piece of equipment The system displays the functional location at which it isinstalled. You cannot make an entry in this field. If theequipment is not installed, the field for the functional locationis empty.

Enter a functional location The system does not display any further functional locationdata.

Want to enter acombination of material andserial number

können Sie dies nur, wenn die Sicht des Bezugsobjektsdafür eingestellt ist. In einer Objektliste, in der schontechnische Objekte (Equipments, Technische Plätze)angegeben wurden, können Sie keine Kombination ausMaterial- und Serialnummer angeben.

Want to create or process anotification for an object inthe list

For this, use the icon in the corresponding line of the objectlist.

Do QRW use the button 1RWLILFDWLRQ in the orderheader for this function, because you use thisbutton to assign a notification to the orderKHDGHU.

If there are already notifications in the objectlist, but no notification is assigned to the orderheader, the system assigns to it the firstnotification from the object list, if you use thisbutton.

Want to remove the linkagain betweenmaintenance notification

You can only do this, if:

• The PM order was QRW�created directly

Page 45: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

5XOHV�)RU�2EMHFW�/LVW

-XQH����� ��

and order from the PM notification

• The PM order is QRW completed

• The notification is QRW entered in the order header

6HH�DOVR�

Selecting the Object List [Page 46]

Entering Objects and Exiting the List [Page 47]

Page 46: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HOHFWLQJ�WKH�2EMHFW�/LVW

�� -XQH�����

6HOHFWLQJ�WKH�2EMHFW�/LVW1. Select the required maintenance order from the 30�3URFHVVLQJ�screen with 2UGHUV →

&KDQJH or 2UGHUV → /LVW�HGLWLQJ → &KDQJH.

2. In the header data screen of the maintenance order, choose *RWR → 2EMHFW�OLVW.

You reach the object list of the order.

For more information on how to enter objects in the object list, see Entering Objects and Exitingthe List [Page 47].

When working with the object list, note the Rules For Object List [Page 44].

Page 47: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

(QWHULQJ�2EMHFWV�DQG�([LWLQJ�WKH�/LVW

-XQH����� ��

(QWHULQJ�2EMHFWV�DQG�([LWLQJ�WKH�/LVWOnce you have selected the object list, enter the technical objects and maintenance notificationsthat you want to assign to the maintenance order in the list. To do this, carry out the followingfour steps:

1. Make the list ready for input by choosing (GLW → 1HZ�OLQHV.

When working with the object list, note the Rules For Object List [Page 44].

2. Enter each object on a separate line of the list. Where necessary, use the selectionoptions which are available in the pushbutton line.

You can also immediately create a notification for an object entered. For this, youuse the Create notification icon in the desired line of the object list. To save, youhave the following options:

• You can save the notifications immediately. This also saves the order andobject list.

• After the notification data has been entered, you can return to the order toenter additional data. If you save the order, the notification is also saved.

• After the notification data has been entered, you can return to the objectlist to enter additional objects. If you save the object list, the notificationand order are also saved.

3. To exit the object list, choose *RWR → %DFN.

You reach the screen from which you selected the object list.

4. Save the maintenance order.

Page 48: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

3ODQQLQJ�LQ�WKH�30�2UGHU

�� -XQH�����

3ODQQLQJ�LQ�WKH�30�2UGHUThe maintenance tasks that are to be carried out at a technical object often require detailedadvance planning, in order to minimize the time that the object is not productive. Planning amaintenance task as accurately as possible enables the employees on site to carry it out in aspecific and efficient manner. This is extremely important in the case of objects which causebottlenecks and may lead to a shutdown when they are out of order.

This section covers the following topics on planning in maintenance orders:

• Work Scheduling With Operations and Sub-Operations [Page 49]

• Work Scheduling with Sub-Orders [Page 76]

• Material Planning [Page 80]

• Permits [Page 90]

• Estimating Costs [Page 98]

• Budget Management [Page 99]

• Estimating Planned Costs [Page 101]

• Settlement Rule [Page 107]

• Operation Networking Using Relationships [Page 112]

• Scheduling [Page 130]

• Revision Assignment [Page 147]

• Other Order Assignments [Page 148]

• Entry of Partner Data [Page 149]

Page 49: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�:LWK�2SHUDWLRQV�DQG�6XE�2SHUDWLRQV

-XQH����� ��

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�:LWK�2SHUDWLRQV�DQG�6XE�2SHUDWLRQVTo schedule the work to be carried out in the maintenance order, you use:

• 2SHUDWLRQV

An operation describes the activity in a work step in a maintenance order.

• 6XE�RSHUDWLRQV

A sub-operation is an operation assigned hierarchically below another operation. Youcan use sub-operations, for example, to assign the different work centers required tocarry out the work step to an operation.

You use operations and sub-operations to describe the individual work steps.

Planning With Operations [Page 50]

Planning With Sub-Operations [Page 52]

Specifying an Assembly [Page 53]

Describing the Work Steps [Page 54]

Assigning Work Centers [Page 58]

Specifying a Control Key [Page 64]

Specifying the Execution Factor [Page 65]

Entering Further Data [Page 68]

Implementing Capacity Planning and Capacity Leveling [Page 69]

Page 50: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

3ODQQLQJ�:LWK�2SHUDWLRQV

�� -XQH�����

3ODQQLQJ�:LWK�2SHUDWLRQVWhen using operations in work scheduling, you can plan at three different levels of detail,depending on the type of maintenance order involved and the extent of the work being planned:

1. Short orders containing only one operation (fast entry)

For these orders, you can enter data for a single operation in the lowest block of theheader data screen, without having to use any further screens. The operation can befor internal or external processing. You can still access all the operation detailscreens you require for this operation. To do this, select the menu path *RWR →2SHUDWLRQ → �GHWDLO�VFUHHQ!.

2. Long orders without detailed planning

You can use the operation overview for these orders to enter as many operations asrequired in list form.

Select the operation overview from the header data screen with *RWR → 2SHUDWLRQRYHUYLHZ.

3. Short or long orders with detailed planning

You can use the operation overview as well as the operation detail screens for theseorders to enter the following data:

− For detailed information on internal processing, use the screen ,QWHUQDO3URFHVVLQJ�2SHUDWLRQ.

− For detailed information on external processing, use the screen ([WHUQDO3URFHVVLQJ�2SHUDWLRQ�

(See also Contents: External Assignment of Maintenance Tasks [Page 237].)

− For detailed information on the dates of an operation, use the screen 2SHUDWLRQ'DWHV�

(See also Scheduling [Page 130] and Scheduling a PM Order in the Header DataScreen or the Operation Overview [Page 139].)

− To assign material components to an operation, use the screen &RPSRQHQW$OORFDWLRQ�2SHUDWLRQ�

(See also Material Planning [Page 80].)

− To assign production resources/tools to an operation, use the screen 357�1HZ/LQHV.

(See also Contents: Production Resources/Tools (PRT) [Page 185].)

− To enter qualifications, use the screen 4XDOLILFDWLRQV�

(See also Qualification/Suitability [Page 59])

− To enter company-specific user data, use the screen 8VHU�GDWD�

(See also Entering Further Data [Page 68])

Page 51: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

3ODQQLQJ�:LWK�2SHUDWLRQV

-XQH����� ��

If you initially created and saved an order with header data only and no operation,the system automatically creates a first operation for the order header whensaving. This is necessary, because you need at least one operation to be able toplan, schedule and confirm the order.

The operation created automatically contains the same data as the order header.You can change it as required.

Page 52: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

3ODQQLQJ�:LWK�6XE�2SHUDWLRQV

�� -XQH�����

3ODQQLQJ�:LWK�6XE�2SHUDWLRQVIf several work centers are required to process an operation, it is possible to divide the operationsinto sub-operations. For each sub-operation, you can plan a different work center which isinvolved in carrying out the operation. The operation itself may contain a work center which, forexample, coordinates the work centers in the sub-operations.

You can carry out capacity planning for the work centers in sub-operations. However, you cannotschedule sub-operations independently, since scheduling is carried out at operation level.

You create sub-operations in the same way as operations in the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ. In addition,you have to specify the number of the operation to which they are assigned.

Page 53: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6SHFLI\LQJ�DQ�$VVHPEO\

-XQH����� ��

6SHFLI\LQJ�DQ�$VVHPEO\For each operation and sub-operation, you can specify the assembly of the technical referenceobject at which the work described is to be carried out. You make the entry in the appropriatedetail screen. To do this, carry out the following seven steps:

1. Select the maintenance order and display the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ.

2. Select the operations for which you want to enter an assembly.

3. Choose:

− 2SHUDWLRQ → ,QWHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ if the operation is being processed internally.

− 2SHUDWLRQ → ([WHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ if the operation is being processed externally.

You see the detail screen for the first operation selected.

4. Enter the assembly in the appropriate field.

If you do not know the number of the assembly required, you can select it from the billof material of the reference object. In the detail screen, choose:

− ([WUDV → $VVHPEO\�RSHUDWLRQ → 6WUXFWXUH�JUDSKLF�for a graphical display

− ([WUDV → $VVHPEO\�RSHUDWLRQ → 6WUXFWXUH�OLVW�for a display in list form

5. When you have entered the required assembly for the first operation selected, go tothe detail screen of the next operation with 2SHUDWLRQ → $GG��RSHUDWLRQV → 1H[WRSHUDWLRQ�

6. When you have edited all the operations selected, choose *RWR → %DFN�to return tothe 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ.

7. Save the maintenance order.

Page 54: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'HVFULELQJ�WKH�:RUN�6WHSV

�� -XQH�����

'HVFULELQJ�WKH�:RUN�6WHSVEach operation and sub-operation contains a description of the individual work step to beperformed.

You can describe operations in the overview screen or in one of the detail screens. The headerdata screen contains an operation mask for orders that contain only a single operation.

You can enter the description as a:

• Short text

• Long text

• Standard text

For more information on how to proceed in each case, see the following topics:

• Describing an Operation Using a Short Text [Page 55]

• Describing an Operation Using a Long Text [Page 56]

• Describing an Operation Using Standard Texts [Page 57]

Page 55: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'HVFULELQJ�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ�8VLQJ�D�6KRUW�7H[W

-XQH����� ��

'HVFULELQJ�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ�8VLQJ�D�6KRUW�7H[WEach operation contains a line of short text. This is the first text line of the operation description,which can be extended using the long text.

In many cases, this line is long enough for describing the work to be performed.

The short text for each operation is ready for input in:

• The operation overview

• The detail screen for internal or external processing

If you need to enter a long text for an operation, see Describing an Operation Using a Long Text[Page 56].

Page 56: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'HVFULELQJ�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ�8VLQJ�D�/RQJ�7H[W

�� -XQH�����

'HVFULELQJ�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ�8VLQJ�D�/RQJ�7H[WIn some cases, you will need to provide a detailed description for operations that are complicatedor that require particular caution. You can do this using the SAPVFULSW long text editor.

To call up the text editor and enter a text, perform the following five steps:

1. Select the operation for which you want to enter a long text in the operation list.

2. You now have the following two options:

– First select the detail screen for the operation selected and then 2SHUDWLRQ →/RQJ�WH[W.

– Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → /RQJ�WH[W directly.

In both cases, you see the screen &KDQJH�7H[W��2SHUDWLRQ��RSHUDWLRQ�QXPEHU!/DQJXDJH��ODQJXDJH�NH\!.

3. Enter the long text for the operation.

4. Save the long text and return to the operation detail screen or the operation list with*RWR → %DFN.

5. Save the maintenance order.

Page 57: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'HVFULELQJ�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ�8VLQJ�6WDQGDUG�7H[WV

-XQH����� ��

'HVFULELQJ�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ�8VLQJ�6WDQGDUG�7H[WVCertain operations and sub-operations will occur repeatedly in the same form in orders. It istherefore useful to use a standardized text description for them. You do this using standard texts.

Standard texts are predefined texts that can be used as a reference for the operation description.You can edit them, thus reducing the amount of text you need to enter.

To use standard texts, perform the following six steps:

1. Select the maintenance order and access the operation overview screen using�*RWR→ 2SHUDWLRQ�RYHUYLHZ.

You can enter standard text keys in this screen or in a detail screen for the relevantoperation.

2. Enter a standard text key in the appropriate field and press ENTER.

If the text is longer that the short text line available, the field 7H[W is selected for thatoperation.

3. Check the long text and edit it if necessary. To do this, select the operation andchoose 2SHUDWLRQ → /RQJ�WH[W.

The system branches to the text editor screen. If you also entered a short text for theoperation and specified that this should not be overwritten by the standard text, youwill see the short text displayed in the first line of the editor. The following linescontain the standard text.

4. Check the standard text and change it if necessary.

5. Save the final version of the text and return to the previous screen with *RWR�→ %DFN�

6. Save the maintenance order.

Standard texts are created for your system by your system administrator usingthe Customizing function.

Page 58: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$VVLJQLQJ�:RUN�&HQWHUV

�� -XQH�����

$VVLJQLQJ�:RUN�&HQWHUVYou have to specify who is to carry out each individual operation and sub-operation. In general,internal work centers such as "mechanics" or "electricians" are used here. However, it is alsopossible to have individual operations carried out by external companies.

For more information on external processing, see Contents: External Assignment of MaintenanceTasks [Page 237].

You enter work centers in the operation overview or the operation detail screens.

If a responsible work center has been entered in the master record of the reference object or inthe order, the system proposes it as a default for the individual operations, but you can overwritethis if necessary.

If you want to enter additional work center information, see also Qualification/Suitability [Page59].

Page 59: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

4XDOLILFDWLRQ�6XLWDELOLW\

-XQH����� ��

4XDOLILFDWLRQ�6XLWDELOLW\If you need employees with particular qualifications to carry out the work, you can specify thesefor an operation or sub-operation. You can do this in one of the following ways:

• 4XDOLILFDWLRQ�GDWD

This data comprises entries in the form of requirement profiles, jobs and positions.

Example [Page 62]

For information on how to enter qualifications for an operation, see SpecifyingQualifications [Page 60].

The qualification data you use is maintained in the Human Resources System (HR).

• 6XLWDELOLW\�GDWD

Example [Page 63]

For information on how to enter a suitability for an operation, see SpecifyingSuitability [Page 61].

The suitability data you use is maintained by your system administrator using theappropriate Customizing function.

Page 60: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6SHFLI\LQJ�4XDOLILFDWLRQV

�� -XQH�����

6SHFLI\LQJ�4XDOLILFDWLRQVTo enter HR-specific qualifications for a work center in an operation, carry out the following fivesteps:

1. Select the maintenance order.

2. Make the required operation entries.

3. Select the qualification screen:

– For the operation in the KHDGHU�GDWD�VFUHHQ, choose *RWR → 2SHUDWLRQ →4XDOLILFDWLRQV in the header data screen.

– For an operation in the�RSHUDWLRQ�RYHUYLHZ, first select the relevant operationand then choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 4XDOLILFDWLRQV.

4. In the top part of the 4XDOLILFDWLRQ screen, you see information that you have alreadyentered for the operation selected.

Enter the qualification specifications you require in the block 4XDOLILFDWLRQV�UHTXLUHG�

5. Save the maintenance order.

Page 61: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6SHFLI\LQJ�6XLWDELOLW\

-XQH����� ��

6SHFLI\LQJ�6XLWDELOLW\To specify a suitability for a work center in an operation, carry out the following five steps:

1. Select the maintenance order.

2. Make the required operation entries.

3. Select the relevant operation and go to the internal processing screen for thatoperation.

4. Enter the required suitability in the appropriate field.

5. Save the maintenance order.

Page 62: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6SHFLI\LQJ�6XLWDELOLW\

�� -XQH�����

([DPSOH��4XDOLILFDWLRQVAn employee with a welding qualification is required to carry out repair work on a boiler.

The following options are available to the maintenance planner responsible when completing theblock�4XDOLILFDWLRQV�UHTXLUHG:

• Entering a requirements profile which includes the qualification “Welding”.Example: welding and soldering qualification

• Entering the job “Welder”.

• Entering the position “Welder in Mechanics, Plant 0001”.The position need not necessarily refer to a person. For example, there may be threewelders working in Plant 0001 in Mechanics.

Page 63: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6SHFLI\LQJ�6XLWDELOLW\

-XQH����� ��

([DPSOH��6XLWDELOLW\A welder is required to carry out repair work on a boiler. Since the work involved in this case isquite complex, the employee needs to have an advanced welding certificate, with evidence of acertain degree of relevant experience.

The maintenance planner responsible enters the advanced welding certificate �� in the field6XLWDELOLW\ for the operation.

Page 64: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6SHFLI\LQJ�D�&RQWURO�.H\

�� -XQH�����

6SHFLI\LQJ�D�&RQWURO�.H\In the operation overview or the operation detail screen for each operation and sub-operation,you have to enter a control key, which states how an operation or a sub-operation should bedealt with. It determines, for example, whether shop papers are to be printed for the operation,whether it is to be scheduled and/or costed and whether an operation or sub-operation requiresconfirmation upon completion.

If a default value for the control key has been specified in your system using the Customizingfunction, the system proposes it as an entry, which you can overwrite if necessary.

Page 65: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6SHFLI\LQJ�WKH�([HFXWLRQ�)DFWRU

-XQH����� ��

6SHFLI\LQJ�WKH�([HFXWLRQ�)DFWRU

8VH�RI�WKH�([HFXWLRQ�)DFWRU

You can specify the number of times that each operation is to be carried out for an order. This isparticularly useful if you are using task lists.

Example [Page 67]

The execution factor affects the following operation data:

• Work

• Duration

• Material quantity

The entries in these fields refer in each case to the current execution factor specified for theoperation in the order. In other words, the system multiplies the entries for work, duration andmaterial quantity by the execution factor entered.

The execution factor of a sub-operation is determined by the execution factor of the operation towhich it belongs.

For operations in maintenance orders, the system sets a default value of �. Youcan change this value.

As a rule, the execution factor valid for operations in task lists is 1. If a differentexecution factor was entered in the task list, this becomes the default value forthe execution factor used in order processing.

If the indicator )L[HG�TW\� is set (in the BOM item under *HQHUDO�GDWD�, theexecution factor of the components is not taken into account for the componentquantity.

If the indicator )L[HG�RS�TXDQWLW\ is set (in the external processing screen of theoperation), the execution factor is not taken into account.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�([HFXWLRQ�)DFWRU�IRU�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ

To specify an execution factor other than that selected by the system for an operation, carry outthe following six steps:

1. Select the maintenance order in Create or Change mode.

2. Go to the operation overview.

3. Select the operation you require and choose 2SHUDWLRQ → ([HFXWLRQ�IDFWRU�The system displays a dialog box.

4. Enter the execution factor and choose &RQWLQXH.

5. Check the entries converted by the system for work and duration. Check the materialquantities for the operation in the operation component screen by using 2SHUDWLRQ →2YHUYLHZV�→ &RPSRQHQWV.

Make any necessary changes.

Page 66: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6SHFLI\LQJ�WKH�([HFXWLRQ�)DFWRU

�� -XQH�����

6. Save the maintenance order.

Page 67: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6SHFLI\LQJ�WKH�([HFXWLRQ�)DFWRU

-XQH����� ��

([DPSOH��([HFXWLRQ�)DFWRUWinter tires are to be fitted to three vehicles of the same type.

The vehicles are represented in the system as pieces of equipment. To carry out the work, youcreate a maintenance order for the three vehicles, using a task list that was created for thereference object. Operation 0030, for carrying out the work step has the text “Fit winter tires”. Thematerial components assigned to it are “4 tires” and the work duration is 20 minutes.

You enter execution factor � for operation 0030.

The system increases the number of tires required to 12 and the work duration to 60 minutes.

Page 68: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(QWHULQJ�)XUWKHU�'DWD

�� -XQH�����

(QWHULQJ�)XUWKHU�'DWDIt may not be possible to enter certain data that is important to your company in the predefinedfields in the SAP standard system. In this case, you can use the fields in the screen 8VHU�'DWD foreach operation and sub-operation.

The screen 8VHU�'DWD�contains up to twelve fields for entering data. You assign a meaning toeach of the fields using a NH\�ZRUG�,'.

The key word ID entries are maintained by your system administrator in&XVWRPL]LQJ.

To select the screen 8VHU�'DWD and enter the data you require, carry out the following sevensteps:

1. Select the maintenance order and *RWR → 2SHUDWLRQ�RYHUYLHZ�to access theoperation overview screen.

2. Select the operation for which you want to enter user data.

3. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 8VHU�GDWD�

You see the user data screen.

4. Enter the field key valid for you and press ENTER.

5. The system displays the field labels valid for the key word ID selected.

6. Make the entries you require.

7. Save the maintenance order.

Two customer enhancements are also available for the operation user data:

• You can use the customer enhancement IWO10015 in a user data field torequest possible entries.

• You can use the customer enhancement IWO10016 for the user data fields toperform individual checks.

Before you use the enhancements, read the corresponding documentation.To do this, choose 7RROV�→�$%$3�:RUNEHQFK�→�8WLOLWLHV�→�(QKDQFHPHQWV�→'HILQLWLRQ�in the initial SAP screen.Enter the name of the enhancement.Then select 'RFXPHQWDWLRQ and choose 'LVSOD\.

Page 69: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

,PSOHPHQWLQJ�&DSDFLW\�3ODQQLQJ�DQG�&DSDFLW\�/HYHOLQJ

-XQH����� ��

,PSOHPHQWLQJ�&DSDFLW\�3ODQQLQJ�DQG�&DSDFLW\�/HYHOLQJ

8VH

&DSDFLW\�3ODQQLQJ

In Plant Maintenance, the capacity planning functions are used for:

• To determine the capacity available at the individual maintenance work centers, andto optimize its use with respect to daily changing requirements.

• To utilize fully the productive work centers affected by maintenance tasks.

&DSDFLW\�/HYHOLQJ

The large numbers of maintenance orders required both for unplanned and regular maintenancework often make it impossible to obtain an even distribution of the load on all the availablemaintenance work centers at the time of order creation. Often, more capacity is planned than isavailable for some work centers, while other work centers have free capacity available. Toensure an even distribution of the capacity load, the maintenance planner must perform capacityleveling on a regular basis.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV• In order to get the best out of the capacity planning and capacity leveling functions,

your system must first be set up in a particular way. Your system administrator carriesout the system configuration using the &XVWRPL]LQJ function.

For more information, see PP - Capacity Planning [Ext.].

• If you want to utilize fully the PP work centers affected by maintenance tasks, thefollowing prerequisites must be fulfilled:

− The maintenance object refers to a PP work center.

For this, the PP work center must be entered in the location data of theequipment or functional location.

− The indicator 6\V�&RQG�(system condition) is set in the order at header level.

This causes the system to create capacity requirement records.

You can set the indicator for the system condition both in the maintenance item(for regular orders) and in the orders directly entered.

)HDWXUHVThe following functions are available for capacity planning and capacity leveling:

6SOLWWLQJ

For each individual operation, you can enter the following information as required:

• That it is to be processed by several employees, if necessary in given time segments

• That it is to be processed by a single employee in given time segments

Page 70: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

,PSOHPHQWLQJ�&DSDFLW\�3ODQQLQJ�DQG�&DSDFLW\�/HYHOLQJ

�� -XQH�����

$XWRPDWLF�6SOLWWLQJ

You can create splitting records automatically for all operations for which the same main workcenter is entered as on the order header data screen.

For this, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

• Persons must be assigned to the main work center entered in the order header.

• In the Customizing of Plant Maintenance, a partner determination procedure must beentered for the order type. For the responsible employee, a partner function of thedetermination procedure must be entered. This function must be of the type “person”.

• If the created splits are to be dispatched automatically by the system, the field /RDGfor the order type must also be selected in the Customizing of Plant Maintenance.

'LVSDWFKLQJ

You can dispatch individual operations for specific planning periods of a maintenance workcenter. Dispatching means that the maintenance work center is bound to carry out themaintenance tasks.

In the planning board, the following functions are available for dispatching:

• From the quantity of undispatched operations/splits, you can dispatch individualoperations/splits in certain planning periods of a work center in the planning board.

With dispatching, you determine the execution of maintenance tasks by the workcenter and thereby reduce the available capacity of the work center.

The data for dispatched operations/splits is also not changed should the order berescheduled.

• You can also dispatch operations for a different work center from the original in theoperation entered.

'HDOORFDWLQJ

You can deallocate individual operations from specific planning periods of a maintenance workcenter. This cancels the requirement for the work center to carry out the maintenance tasks. Youcan then redispatch the operations to another period.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

During capacity leveling, you may determine that certain entries in the maintenance order needto be changed and make the necessary changes.

'LVSOD\LQJ�WKH�$YDLODEOH�&DSDFLW\

You can display the capacity available at a maintenance work center over several planningperiods.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�$YDLODEOH�&DSDFLW\

You can change the capacity available at a maintenance work center in the individual planningperiods.

Page 71: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

,PSOHPHQWLQJ�&DSDFLW\�3ODQQLQJ�DQG�&DSDFLW\�/HYHOLQJ

-XQH����� ��

&UHDWLQJ�&DSDFLW\�5HTXLUHPHQWV�IRU�WKH�33�:RUN�&HQWHU

For the order, you can create a capacity requirement for the PP work center entered in themaster record of the reference object.

6HH�DOVR�

For functions which are available within order processing, read the following:

• Selecting Capacity Planning for Plant Maintenance [Page 72]

• Splitting and Dispatching Individual Operation [Page 74]

• Splitting Several Operations at the Same Time and Dispatching Automatically [Page75]

• Deallocating Individual Operation Splits [Page 73]

For more information about capacity planning and the planning board, see PP - CapacityPlanning [Ext.].

Page 72: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HOHFWLQJ�&DSDFLW\�3ODQQLQJ�IRU�3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH

�� -XQH�����

6HOHFWLQJ�&DSDFLW\�3ODQQLQJ�IRU�3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFHYou choose capacity planning for Plant Maintenance using /RJLVWLFV�→�3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH�→0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ�→�&DSDFLW\�SODQQLQJ → �UHTXLUHG�IXQFWLRQ!.

For capacity leveling, you use the desired options in the menu /HYHOLQJ. For this, there is atabular and a graphical planning board.

For more information about tabular and graphical planning boards, see PP - Capacity Planning[Ext.].

Page 73: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'HDOORFDWLQJ�,QGLYLGXDO�2SHUDWLRQ�6SOLWV

-XQH����� ��

'HDOORFDWLQJ�,QGLYLGXDO�2SHUDWLRQ�6SOLWV1. On the operation overview screen for the order, select the required operation and

choose 2SHUDWLRQ�→�5HTXLUHPHQW�DVVLJQPHQW.

You reach the requirements assignment screen in which you see all the split recordsfor the operation.

2. Cancel the selection for the dispatching of splits.

3. Save the order.

The system deallocates the splits no longer marked for this operation.

Page 74: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6SOLWWLQJ�DQG�'LVSDWFKLQJ�,QGLYLGXDO�2SHUDWLRQ

�� -XQH�����

6SOLWWLQJ�DQG�'LVSDWFKLQJ�,QGLYLGXDO�2SHUDWLRQ

This function is available LQ�WKH�RUGHU�DQG�LQ�WKH�SODQQLQJ�WDEOH. To perform it inthe order, proceed as follows:

1. In the operation overview screen of the order, select the required operation andchoose 2SHUDWLRQ�→�5HTXLUHPHQW�DVVLJQPHQW.

You reach the requirements assignment screen.

2. Enter the data regarding persons and time for the required splits. In addition, specifywhether or not the splits should be dispatched.

3. Save the order.

The system creates the split records for the operation and dispatches the splitsindicated.

Page 75: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6SOLWWLQJ�6HYHUDO�2SHUDWLRQV�DW�WKH�6DPH�7LPH�DQG�'LVSDWFKLQJ�$XWRPDWLFDOO\

-XQH����� ��

6SOLWWLQJ�6HYHUDO�2SHUDWLRQV�DW�WKH�6DPH�7LPH�DQG'LVSDWFKLQJ�$XWRPDWLFDOO\

This function is RQO\ available LQ�WKH�RUGHU.

1. In the header data screen of the order, enter the desired main work center and in thefield 3HUVRQ, enter the person responsible.

2. Ensure that all operations for the order, which you want to split and dispatchautomatically, contain the same work center as the order header.

3. Save the order.

The system now creates split records for all operations whose work centercorresponds to the work center in the order header. If the field /RDG is selected inCustomizing, it also dispatches the splits for these operations automatically.

Page 76: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�6XE�2UGHUV

�� -XQH�����

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�6XE�2UGHUV

:KHQ�'R�<RX�8VH�6XE�2UGHUV"

There are times when it is not sufficient to divide a maintenance order into operations and sub-operations. This is often the case with very extensive orders, which may for example involveseveral maintenance planner groups.

In his case you can create sub-orders for an order that acts as a superior order.

Example [Page 77]

:KDW�5XOHV�$SSO\�WR�6XE�2UGHUV"

The following rules apply to sub-orders:

• You can create sub-orders for other sub-orders. In this way, you obtain an orderhierarchy.

• You can organize the dates of different sub-orders in such a way that they need to beprocessed in a particular chronological order.

• You can only technically complete a superior order when all the sub-orders for thatorder have been technically completed.

For information on how to create a sub-order for a maintenance order, see Creating a Sub-Order[Page 78].

For information on how to obtain an overview of all the sub-orders for a maintenance order, seeDisplaying Sub-Orders [Page 79].

Page 77: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�6XE�2UGHUV

-XQH����� ��

([DPSOH��6XE�2UGHUV

2UGHUV

A large production system has broken down. The maintenance order “Repair system XPZ” iscreated to plan its repair.

The following, extensive jobs need to be carried out at the system:

• Welding

• Work on the power supply

• Exchanging electronic components

• Preparing and carrying out an industry standard check

Since each of these jobs need to be processed in detail by the responsible maintenanceplanners, the planner responsible for the superior order creates sub-orders for the individual jobs.The planner responsible for a particular job is specified in the relevant order. This enables you toplan the tasks in the orders assigned to you at the required level of detail.

Page 78: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�D�6XE�2UGHU

�� -XQH�����

&UHDWLQJ�D�6XE�2UGHUTo create a sub-order for a maintenance order, carry out the following six steps:

1. In the initial SAP screen, choose /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFHSURFHVVLQJ.

2. In the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen, choose 2UGHUV → &UHDWH��VSHFLDO�→�&UHDWHVXE�RUGHU�

You reach the initial screen for creating sub-orders.

3. Make all the necessary and required entries and enter the number of the order forwhich you want to create the sub-order.

4. Press ENTER.

You reach the header data screen of the sub-order. The system automatically entersthe superior order in the order header and copies the reference object. You canchange this if necessary.

5. To plan the sub-order, proceed in the same way as when planning a normal order(see Contents: Planning in the PM Order [Page 48]).

6. Save the sub-order.

Page 79: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'LVSOD\LQJ�6XE�2UGHUV

-XQH����� ��

'LVSOD\LQJ�6XE�2UGHUV

'LVSOD\LQJ�6XE�2UGHUV�LQ�WKH�2UGHU

The existence of sub-orders for an order is displayed by the system using the icon $OOHVH[SDQGLHUHQ.

If there are no sub-orders for an order, this icon is not displayed.

If you choose the icon ([SDQG�DOO or the menu path ([WUDV�→�6XE�RUGHUV�→�2YHUYLHZ, you seeall the sub-orders which have been assigned to this maintenance order.

'LVSOD\LQJ�6XE�2UGHUV�LQ�WKH�0XOWL�/HYHO�2UGHU�/LVW

To display the sub-orders for a specific number of maintenance orders, proceed as follows:

1. Select the multi-level order display function from the SAP menu with /RJLVWLFV →3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → /LVW�HGLWLQJ → 'LVSOD\�PXOWL�OHY��.

You reach a selection screen.

2. Complete the selection screen according to your requirements, using the on-line helpfunctions to assist you.

3. In the section )LOWHU, complete the fields you require and select the field 6XE�RUGHUV.

4. Start the selection with 3URJUDP → ([HFXWH�

The system creates a multi-level list of the orders matching your selection criteria, andcontaining any sub-orders assigned to the different orders.

6HH�DOVR�

For information about list editing, see:

• Selection of Maintenance Orders and Operations Using Lists [Page 250]

• Working with Lists [Ext.]

Page 80: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

0DWHULDO�3ODQQLQJ

�� -XQH�����

0DWHULDO�3ODQQLQJFor each operation in a maintenance order, you can dispatch the materials required for carryingout the task. Materials can be BOM components of the reference object, or materials that werecreated in the system in Materials Management.

The materials that you plan for the maintenance order are reserved for it in the warehouse,provided they are held in stock. You can define when the reservation should be performed usingthe Customizing function. For each order type, you can:

• Automatically create the reservation immediately

In this case, the system enters the indicator “Reservation applicable to MRP” in theheader data screen for each maintenance order of this type. This indicator applies tothe entire order and cannot be reversed.

• Individually define when the reservation is to be created

In this case, you can define yourself when the indicator “Reservation applicable toMRP” is to be set. In this way, you can individually define for each maintenance orderwhen the reservation is to be created.

The indicator “Reservation applicable to MRP” is automatically set when yourelease the maintenance order.

Once the order has been released, the materials can be removed from the warehouse by thepersons carrying out the job. Non-stock materials need to be ordered and delivered for the order.

Using the Customizing function, you can define for each order type whethermaterial reservation or purchase requisition creation should occur immediately oronce the order has been released. You can, however, change this indicator inthe order header when processing the order. Note that you FDQQRW reverse thischange.

You can basically allocate the material needed to carry out the activity described in an operationto every operation of a maintenance order. You can use the following standard material types, ormaterial types you have defined yourself, which have the same properties:

• Stock material

• Non-stock material

• Raw material

• Text

You cannot allocate materials to sub-operations. For information on how todispatch material using bills of material in order processing, see Contents: WorkScheduling with Bills of Material [Page 175].

For information on how to allocate the individual material types, see the following topics:

Page 81: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

0DWHULDO�3ODQQLQJ

-XQH����� ��

• Assigning Stock Material [Page 82]

• Assigning Non-Stock Material [Page 83]

• Assigning Raw Material [Page 85]

• Assigning Text [Page 86]

The following functions are also available:

Deleting the Material Assigned [Page 87]

Displaying Assigned Materials [Page 88]

Checking Material Availability [Page 89]

Page 82: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$VVLJQLQJ�6WRFN�0DWHULDO

�� -XQH�����

$VVLJQLQJ�6WRFN�0DWHULDOYou can assign stock material to an operation in the component overview screen for the materialcomponents of all the order operations, or in the individual component screen for a specificoperation:

• To access the FRPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ�VFUHHQ�IRU�WKH�PDWHULDO�FRPSRQHQWV�RI�DOOWKH�RUGHU�RSHUDWLRQV, choose *RWR�→�&RPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ in the header datascreen or the operation overview of the maintenance order.

You reach the component overview for the maintenance order.

• To access the FRPSRQHQW�VFUHHQ�RI�D�VSHFLILF�RSHUDWLRQ, select the operationoverview of the maintenance order, select the operation you require and then use2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV�→ &RPSRQHQWV.

You reach the component overview for the operation.

Proceed with the following two steps:

1. Enter all the stock materials required, together with any further information needed forthe operation in the list.

Stock materials are defined by a particular item category, which you have to specifyfor each stock material item in the list. You can find the item category valid for stockmaterials in your system using the on-line help for possible entries.

If you are in the component overview screen for the material components of all theorder operations, you must also enter the operation to which each component isbeing assigned.

2. Save the maintenance order.

Page 83: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$VVLJQLQJ�1RQ�6WRFN�0DWHULDO

-XQH����� ��

$VVLJQLQJ�1RQ�6WRFN�0DWHULDOYou can assign non-stock material to an operation in the component overview screen for thematerial components of all the order operations, or in the individual component screen for aspecific operation:

• To access the FRPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ�VFUHHQ�IRU�WKH�PDWHULDO�FRPSRQHQWV�RI�DOOWKH�RUGHU�RSHUDWLRQV, choose *RWR�→�&RPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ in the header datascreen or the operation overview of the maintenance order�

You see the component overview for the maintenance order.

• To access the FRPSRQHQW�VFUHHQ�RI�D�VSHFLILF�RSHUDWLRQ, select the operationoverview of the maintenance order, select the operation you require and then use2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV�→ &RPSRQHQWV.

You see the component overview for the operation.

Proceed with the following three steps:

1. Enter all the non-stock materials required, together with any further informationnecessary for the operation in the list.

Non-stock materials are defined by a particular item category, which you have tospecify for each non-stock material item in the list. You can find the item category fornon-stock materials using the on-line help for possible entries.

If you are in the component overview screen for the material components of all theorder operations, you must also enter the operation to which each component isbeing assigned.

2. Press ENTER.

For each non-stock item where purchasing data has to be completed, the systemdisplays a screen, in which you have to enter the purchasing data for the non-stockmaterial. Make all the necessary specifications in the screen.

When you have entered all the specifications for the non-stock material, choose *RWR→ %DFN to return to the screen for allocating components.

3. If you want the non-stock material to be delivered to a certain address, you have thefollowing possible entries:

± 0DQXDO�HQWU\

Select the required component and choose &RPSRQHQWV�→�'HOLYHU\�DGGUHVV.You reach a dialog box in which you can enter the delivery address.

If you must enter the same delivery address for a number of non-stockcomponents in the order, the can use the function 9RUKHULJH�HLQVHW]HQ in thedialog box. The system then automatically creates in the box those deliveryaddresses which were entered for the previous non-stock material.

± $XWRPDWLF�GHWHUPLQDWLRQ

For this, choose 2UGHU�→�)XQFWLRQV�→�5HGHILQH�GHOLYHU\�DGGUHVV on thecomponent assignment screen.

Page 84: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$VVLJQLQJ�1RQ�6WRFN�0DWHULDO

�� -XQH�����

The system now determines the delivery address automatically according to thespecifications which have been maintained in the purchasing data in theCustomizing of Plant Maintenance for the access sequence for the proposedaddress.

You reach a dialog box in which you enter, if necessary, whether deliveryaddresses which have already been created manually should be overwritten ornot.

If necessary, check the delivery address determined by selecting the desired non-stock components and calling up the address dialog box with &RPSRQHQW →'HOLYHU\�DGGUHVV.

The system automatically writes the delivery address to the purchase requisition fornon-stock material. If it cannot determine an address, and you have not made anymanual entries, the system automatically uses the plant address.

4. Save the maintenance order.

Page 85: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$VVLJQLQJ�5DZ�0DWHULDO

-XQH����� ��

$VVLJQLQJ�5DZ�0DWHULDOYou can assign raw material to an operation in the component overview screen for the materialcomponents of all the order operations, or in the individual component screen for a specificoperation:

• To access the FRPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ�VFUHHQ�IRU�WKH�PDWHULDO�FRPSRQHQWV�RI�DOOWKH�RUGHU�RSHUDWLRQV, choose *RWR�→�&RPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ in the header datascreen or the operation overview of the maintenance order�

You reach the component overview for the maintenance order.

• To access the FRPSRQHQW�VFUHHQ�RI�D�VSHFLILF�RSHUDWLRQ, select the operationoverview of the maintenance order, select the operation you require and then use2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV�→ &RPSRQHQWV.

You reach the component overview for the operation.

Proceed with the following five steps:

1. Enter all the raw materials required, together with any further information necessaryfor the operation in the list. Raw materials are defined by a particular item category,which you have to specify for each raw material item in the list. You can find the itemcategory for raw materials using the on-line help for possible entries.

If you are in the component overview screen for the material components of all theorder operations, you must also enter the operation to which each component isbeing assigned.

2. Press ENTER.

3. Select the variable-sized items for which you want to specify additional data. Thenchoose &RPSRQHQW → 9DU6L]H3DUW�GDWD.

You see the screen for entering variable-size data for the first variable-sized itemselected.

4. Make all the necessary entries in this screen. Press ENTER to go to the variable-sizedata screen for the next item.

When you have made all the necessary specifications for the raw materials entered,you return to the list of material components assigned with *RWR�→�%DFN.

5. Save the maintenance order.

Page 86: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$VVLJQLQJ�7H[W

�� -XQH�����

$VVLJQLQJ�7H[WYou can assign text to an operation in the component overview screen for the materialcomponents of all the order operations, or in the individual component screen for a specificoperation:

• To access the FRPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ�VFUHHQ�IRU�WKH�PDWHULDO�FRPSRQHQWV�RI�DOOWKH�RUGHU�RSHUDWLRQV, choose *RWR�→�&RPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ in the header datascreen or the operation overview of the maintenance order�

You reach the component overview for the maintenance order.

• To access the FRPSRQHQW�VFUHHQ�RI�D�VSHFLILF�RSHUDWLRQ, select the operationoverview of the maintenance order, select the operation you require and then use2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV�→ &RPSRQHQWV.

You reach the component overview for the operation.

Proceed with the following two steps:

1. In the list, enter all the texts you require as well as any further necessary informationfor the operation. Texts require a certain item category, which you must specify foreach text item in the list. You will find the valid item category for texts in the possibleentries online help.

If you are in the component overview screen for the material components of all theorder operations, you must also enter the operation to which each component isbeing assigned.

2. Save the maintenance order.

Page 87: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'HOHWLQJ�WKH�0DWHULDO�$VVLJQHG

-XQH����� ��

'HOHWLQJ�WKH�0DWHULDO�$VVLJQHGIn some cases, you may need to delete previously allocated material components from themaintenance order. This is possible both in a maintenance order that has the system status"created" and in one that has the system status "released", although with different effects:

'HOHWLQJ�LQ�D��� +DV�WKH�IROORZLQJ�FRQVHTXHQFHV�

Maintenance order with the status"created"

The material item is deleted from the list.

Maintenance order with the status"released"

The system sets a deletion indicator for the item.

The line is still displayed for documentation purposes,since shop papers may already have been printed, orthe material may already have been withdrawn from thewarehouse. However, you can no longer edit the line.

To delete material components for an operation of the maintenance order, carry out the followingthree steps:

1. Select the screen &RPSRQHQW�$OORFDWLRQ�2SHUDWLRQ for the required operation byselecting it in the operation screen and choosing 2SHUDWLRQ�→�2YHUYLHZV→ &RPSRQHQWV.

2. Select the material item that you want to delete and select (GLW�→�'HOHWH.

3. Confirm that the item selected is to be deleted and save the maintenance order.

Page 88: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'LVSOD\LQJ�$VVLJQHG�0DWHULDOV

�� -XQH�����

'LVSOD\LQJ�$VVLJQHG�0DWHULDOVYou can display all the materials that have been allocated to an order in an overview list. To dothis, choose *RWR�→�&RPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ�in the header data screen or the operation overview.

Page 89: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&KHFNLQJ�0DWHULDO�$YDLODELOLW\

-XQH����� ��

&KHFNLQJ�0DWHULDO�$YDLODELOLW\When dispatching stock materials for carrying out order operations, you can have the systemcheck whether all the materials in the maintenance order are available in sufficient quantity. Youdo this using the $YDLODELOLW\�FKHFN function.

To check the availability of materials planned for the maintenance order, proceed as follows:

1. Dispatch the materials for the relevant operations as described in the following topics:

– Assigning Stock Material [Page 82]

– Assigning Non-Stock Material [Page 83]

– Assigning Raw Material [Page 85]

– Assigning Text [Page 86]

– Deleting the Material Assigned [Page 87]

2. In the header data screen, choose 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → $YDLODELOLW\�→ 0DWHULDO�

Depending on your system settings and the data entered in the material masterrecords, the system performs an availability check for all the materials allocated to theoperations in the order. It displays an on-line message with the result. If there is notsufficient material available, you can display the error log containing detailedinformation on the results of the check, with *RWR → 3URWRFROV → 0DW�DYDLODELOLW\.

Depending on your system settings in &XVWRPL]LQJ, the system automaticallycarries out an availability check for the materials dispatched when you release amaintenance order. If the check shows that some of the dispatched material is notavailable in sufficient quantity, your system settings determine whether or not youare still able to release the order.

Page 90: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

3HUPLWV

�� -XQH�����

3HUPLWV

8VHWhen planning certain tasks, it may be necessary to fulfill specific regulations or requirements inthe form of permits.

Example: Permits [Page 91]

Permits are displayed as master data in the system. You can find more information aboutdisplaying permits for permits in your system in the SAP document 30���6WUXFWXULQJ�7HFKQLFDO6\VWHPV.

,QWHJUDWLRQPermits can be:

• Specified in the master data of the reference object

• Noted in the master records of objects which are VXSHULRU to the reference object

• Entered PDQXDOO\ by the maintenance planner

They are valid for the whole maintenance order.

The printing of permits is integrated in the printing of shop papers. For more information, seePrinting/Faxing Shop Papers [Page 200].

Permits are represented in the system as master data, using the &XVWRPL]LQJ function. For moreinformation on representing permits in your system, refer to 30�6WUXFWXULQJ�7HFKQLFDO�6\VWHPV.

3UHUHTXLVLWHVTo be able to use permits, these mus thave been created in your system.

To be able to use the class selection for permits, these must:

• Belong to a permit group to which a class of class type 049 has been assigned

• Have been classified using the class characteristics

6HH�DOVR�

• Assigning Permits [Page 92].

• Issuing a Permit [Page 96].

• Canceling an Issued Permit [Page 97].

Page 91: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

3HUPLWV

-XQH����� ��

([DPSOH��3HUPLWVBelow are some examples of possible permits:

• Welding permit

• Boiler examination permit

• Mains switch authorization

• Authentication certificate

Page 92: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$VVLJQLQJ�3HUPLWV

�� -XQH�����

$VVLJQLQJ�3HUPLWVAssigning permits to a maintenance order has the following effects:

Until the assigned permit has been issued, the order has the status 3HUPLWV�RXWVWDQGLQJ.Depending on the indicators you set for your permit allocations or the permits in your masterrecord, the permits must be issued before the order can be released or technically completed. Ineach case, the maintenance order cannot be released or technically completed until thenecessary permits are issued.

The permits you assign to a maintenance order can be entered in the following ways:

$ They can be flagged in the PDVWHU�GDWD�RI�WKH�UHIHUHQFH�REMHFW for the maintenanceorder.

These permits are automatically assigned to the maintenance order by the system, ifthe indicator 'HIDXOW was set for them in the object master data. If they were notindicated in this way, you can allocate them manually (see &).

% They can be noted in the PDVWHU�GDWD�RI�REMHFWV�which are VXSHULRU to the referenceobject of the order (for example, to a superior piece of equipment or to the functionallocation at which the equipment is installed).

Example [Page 93]

These permits are allocated to the maintenance order by the system automatically, ifthe indicator 'HIDXOW was set for them in the object master data. If they were notindicated in this way, you can allocate them manually (see &).

& They can be HQWHUHG�PDQXDOO\�IRU�D�30�RUGHU�by the maintenance planner.

For more information on how to proceed, see Assigning Permits Manually [Page 95].

' They can be determined by the system DXWRPDWLFDOO\�XVLQJ�FODVV�VHOHFWLRQ andassigned to the order.

To do this, you must have permits in your system which:

− Belong to a permit group to which a class of class type 049 has been assigned

− Have been classified using the class characteristics

The permits are determined by the system if you call up the permits in the order. Forthis, the system compares the order data with the characteristic features of theclassified permits available in the system. Permits for which the data corresponds,are automatically assigned to the order.

Example [Page 94]

If you change the order data and then call up the permits again, the system performsthe class selection again. It then changes, if necessary, the permit entries for theorder and marks this in the ORJ. You can call up the log in the order using *RWR →/RJV → 'HWHUPLQH�ORJ. This is where all system messages which occur for permitdetermination are logged.

Page 93: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$VVLJQLQJ�3HUPLWV

-XQH����� ��

([DPSOH��3HUPLWV�LQ�DQ�2EMHFW�+LHUDUFK\A pump (C1-B01-1) is situated at a pumping station (C1-B01), which in turn is located at aclarification plant (functional location C1).

You generally require hearing protection when working in the pumping station. The safetyrequirement was entered as a permit for functional location C1-B01.

A welding permit must be issued for welding work carried out at the pump. The permit wascreated for functional location C1-B01-1.

In a maintenance order for the pump, the system proposes the safety regulations for functionallocation C1-B01 and the welding permit for functional location C1-B01-1, since functional locationC1-B01 is hierarchically superior to functional location C1-B01-1.

Page 94: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

([DPSOH��&ODVV�6HOHFWLRQ�RI�3HUPLWV

�� -XQH�����

([DPSOH��&ODVV�6HOHFWLRQ�RI�3HUPLWVThe permit “Authorize modification” is issued to a permit group to which a class of the class type049 is assigned. It is classified by the characteristic 0DLQWHQDQFH�DFWLYLW\�W\SH with thecharacteristic ��� (= modification).

A maintenance planner creates a maintenance order. For operation 0010, they enter themaintenance activity type ��� and then call up the permits.

The system determines a correspondence between the order data (maintenance activity type���) and the characteristic feature of the classified permit “Authorize modification” and assignsthis automatically to the order.

Page 95: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$VVLJQLQJ�3HUPLWV�0DQXDOO\

-XQH����� ��

$VVLJQLQJ�3HUPLWV�0DQXDOO\1. Select the maintenance order you require in Create or Change mode.

2. Choose +HDGHU → 3HUPLWV

The system displays a dialog box where you can enter the permits. It may alsocontain permits already proposed, permits determined by the class selection or onesyou entered previously.

If you require further lines for entering permits, choose 1HZ�OLQHV.

3. Enter all the permits you require, using the on-line help functions if necessary.

If you want to enter further permits that were defined in the master record of thetechnical object, proceed as follows:

– Choose 3UHGHFHVVRU.

You see a multi-level object list containing the permits assigned in each case.

– Select the permits you require and copy them to the permit list in the order.

4. Enter all the information you need for the permits, using the on-line help functions ifnecessary.

5. Choose &RQWLQXH.

6. Save the maintenance order.

Provided that an assigned permit has not yet been issued, you can delete it atany time.

Page 96: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

,VVXLQJ�D�3HUPLW

�� -XQH�����

,VVXLQJ�D�3HUPLW

3UHUHTXLVLWHVYou can issue permits only when you have the necessary authorization in your user masterrecord.

Permits which have been issued can no longer be deleted.

3URFHGXUH1. Select the required maintenance order in Create or Change mode.

2. Choose +HDGHU → 3HUPLWV.

The system displays a dialog box containing all the permits currently valid for themaintenance order.

If necessary, you can enter additional permits. To do this, proceed as described inAssigning Permits Manually [Page 95].

3. Select one of the following options:

– Issuing permits \RXUVHOI

To do this, select the permits you want to issue and press 3HUPLWV��In this wayyou issue the selected permits and the system writes the relevant data into thefields provided.

– Enter that VRPHRQH�HOVH issued the permit

To do this, enter the name of the person who issued the permit and press ENTER.This issues the permit and the system writes the relevant data into the fieldsprovided.

4. Choose &RQWLQXH�

5. Save the maintenance order.

Page 97: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&DQFHOLQJ�DQ�,VVXHG�3HUPLW

-XQH����� ��

&DQFHOLQJ�DQ�,VVXHG�3HUPLW

You can cancel a previously issued permit, only if you have not already startedexecuting the tasks planned in the maintenance order.

To cancel a permit that has already been issued, perform the following six steps:

1. Select the required maintenance order in Create or Change mode.

2. Choose +HDGHUH → 3HUPLWV.

The system displays a dialog box containing all the permits valid for the maintenanceorder.

3. Select the permit you want to cancel.

4. Choose 'HDFWLYDWH.

The system removes the issue data from the relevant fields. The permit must now bereissued to be valid.

5. Choose &RQWLQXH.

6. Save the maintenance order.

Page 98: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(VWLPDWLQJ�&RVWV

�� -XQH�����

(VWLPDWLQJ�&RVWVYou can specify for an order how high you estimate the performance costs. This makes sensewhen you do not have any data relevant for planning the maintenance order, but canapproximately estimate the performance costs.

There are two methods of specifying estimated costs for a maintenance order:

1. Summed together for the entire order in the header data screen of the order

2. Divided into so-called value categories in the screen 0DLQWDLQ�RUGHU�FRVWV, which youcan go to from the header data screen of the order by choosing *RWR�→�&RVWRYHUYLHZ

Value categories can be understood as a combination of cost elements, Thiscombination is performed by the System Administrator using the Customizing function

The cost elements 692000 and 6939000 are combined as the value category“Internal labor”.

You can only specify estimated costs using value categories for yourmaintenance order if your System Administrator has entered a cost estimateversion in Customizing.

You can specify estimated costs for a maintenance order until it is released.

When you specify estimated costs, the system assigns the maintenance order the status “Costsestimated”.

In contrast to planned and actual costs, estimated costs are QRW updated in the PM-ISMaintenance Information System.

Page 99: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

%XGJHW�0DQDJHPHQW

-XQH����� ��

%XGJHW�0DQDJHPHQWThe budget is the approved cost framework for a maintenance order. It differs from project costsplanning (see Budget Control Using Parallel Project Account Assignment [Page 111] in that it isbinding. Whilst the project costs must be estimated as precisely as possible in the planningphase, the funds are presented in the form of the budget in the permit phase.

Even in order hierarchies, the budget is valid only for the respective individualmaintenance order.

The following budget types exist:

• 2ULJLQDO�EXGJHW

The original budget is the budget that was originally allocated, and not changed bycorrection measures.

• %XGJHW�XSGDWH

Unforeseen events, additional necessary tasks, increases in external processingcosts and other factors can make necessary corrections to a budget. Thesecorrections are known as budget updates. Updating can take the following forms:

− Supplement

− Return

• &XUUHQW�EXGJHW

The current budget is derived from the original budget and the budget updates carriedout. The system performs the following calculation:

Original budget

+ Supplements

Returns

= Current budget

You choose the functions for the budget management of an order using /RJLVWLFV�→�3ODQW0DLQWHQDQFH�→�0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ�→�2UGHUV�→�2UGHU�REMHFW�EXGJHW�→��UHTXLUHGIXQFWLRQ!.

With regard to budget controls for a maintenance order, you must choosebetween the following options:

• You allocate a budget to the maintenance order directly

• You allocate the maintenance order to a project, with which you control thebudget (see Budget Control Using Parallel Project Account Assignment [Page111]

Page 100: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

%XGJHW�0DQDJHPHQW

��� -XQH�����

The method of budget allocation, budget updating and budget availability checkfor maintenance orders corresponds to that for projects, with the distinction thatprojects are concerned with hierarchically structured objects.

For further information on budget management, refer to the SAP document PSProject System [Ext.].

Page 101: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWV

-XQH����� ���

(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWVSeveral different types of costs can be incurred when executing a maintenance order. To obtainan overview of the likely costs before actually carrying out the work, you can use the system topre-cost the work planned and display the costs.

Graphic: Estimating Costs for a PM Order [Page 102]

5HTXLUHPHQWV

A number of requirements exist for estimating planned costs. For more information, seeRequirements for Estimating Planned Costs [Page 103].

&RVWLQJ

For more information on how to use the system to estimate planned costs, see EstimatingPlanned Costs [Page 104].

'LVSOD\

You can display the estimated costs:

• At FRVW�HOHPHQW level

For more information, see Displaying Costs at Cost Element Level [Page 105].

• At YDOXH�FDWHJRU\ level

For more information, see Displaying Costs at Value Category Level [Page 106].

Page 102: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWV

��� -XQH�����

*UDSKLF��(VWLPDWLQJ�&RVWV�IRU�D�30�2UGHU

30�2UGHU &RVWV

Internal processingOp. 10: ME 3 hrsOp. 20: EL 1 hr

External processingOp. 30: EXTERN 1 hr.

Stock material2 pcs Material ABC

Non-stock material2 pcs Material XYZ

Internal processing: US$ 500

External processing: US$ 150

Stock material: US$300

Non-stock material: US$ 500

Total: US$ 1,450

Page 103: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

5HTXLUHPHQWV�IRU�(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWV

-XQH����� ���

5HTXLUHPHQWV�IRU�(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWVTo display planned costs for a maintenance order, you need to have allocated a control key tothe individual operations in the maintenance order, which includes them in the costing process.Operations that do not have an appropriate control key allocated to them are disregarded whenestimating the costs.

If dispatched material components are QRW to be included in costing, you mustdelete the indicator 5HOHY&RVWLQJ in the general data screen of the individualcomponents.

For information on how to display planned costs, see Displaying Costs at Cost Element Level[Page 105].

Page 104: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWV

��� -XQH�����

(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWVYou can use the system to calculate the planned costs for a maintenance order in two ways:

• By saving the order

• Using the function�'HWHUPLQH�FRVWV

(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWV�E\�6DYLQJ�WKH�2UGHU

When you have entered all the data in the maintenance order header and the order operations,save the order. The system automatically determines the costs for the work planned when itsaves the order.

When you select the order again in Change or Display mode, you can display the costs. To dothis, see Displaying Costs at Cost Element Level [Page 105] and Displaying Costs at ValueCategory Level [Page 106].

(VWLPDWLQJ�3ODQQHG�&RVWV�'LUHFWO\

If you want to know the costs for the work planned before saving the maintenance order, you canalso call up the costing function directly.

To do this, go to the header data screen of the maintenance order and choose 2UGHU →)XQFWLRQV → 'HWHUPLQH�FRVWV.

The system determines the costs for the work planned from the order data.

You can now display the calculated costs directly. To do this, proceed as described in DisplayingCosts at Cost Element Level [Page 105] and Displaying Costs at Value Category Level [Page106].

The following applies to both types of costing:

If the system is unable to determine the costs, you can see the reason in a log.To do this, choose *RWR → /RJV → 'HWHUPLQH�FRVWV.

Page 105: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'LVSOD\LQJ�&RVWV�DW�&RVW�(OHPHQW�/HYHO

-XQH����� ���

'LVSOD\LQJ�&RVWV�DW�&RVW�(OHPHQW�/HYHOTo display the costs determined by the system for the maintenance order at cost element level,proceed as follows:

1. Select the required maintenance order.

2. In the header data screen or the operation overview, choose ([WUDV → &RVW�UHSRUWV→��UHTXLUHG�FRVW�UHSRUW!.

If you have selected the planned/actual comparison option, you see an overview ofthe costs determined in the screen $QDO\]H�&RVWV��5HVXOW.

If you have selected the budget/liabilities option, you see the budget report for themaintenance order on the screen %XGJHW�UHSRUW��2UGHUV��5HVXOW�

Page 106: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'LVSOD\LQJ�&RVWV�DW�9DOXH�&DWHJRU\�/HYHO

��� -XQH�����

'LVSOD\LQJ�&RVWV�DW�9DOXH�&DWHJRU\�/HYHO

9DOXH�&DWHJRULHV

Value categories are groupings of cost elements. Value categories are defined by your systemadministrator, using the Project System &XVWRPL]LQJ function.

Cost elements 692000 and 693000 are grouped under value category “Internalactivities”.

&DOOLQJ�8S�WKH�&RVW�'LVSOD\

To display the costs determined by the system for the maintenance order at value category level,proceed as follows:

1. Select the required maintenance order.

2. In the header data screen or the operation screen, choose *RWR → &RVW�RYHUYLHZ.

You see an overview of the costs determined for the value categories created in yoursystem in &XVWRPL]LQJ.

'LVSOD\LQJ�'HWDLOHG�9DOXH�&DWHJRU\�,QIRUPDWLRQ

You can display more detailed information on the individual value categories. To do this, proceedas follows:

1. Select the value category in the overview screen.

2. Choose *RWR → 'HWDLOHG�LQIR.

The system displays a dialog box, with information that includes

− The value category number

− Whether or not the value category is relevant for key figures

− Which key figures from the Plant Maintenance Information System are updatedby the value category

Page 107: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HWWOHPHQW�5XOH

-XQH����� ���

6HWWOHPHQW�5XOHYou have to enter the correct settlement rule into the system, to ensure that the costs incurred inthe execution of the maintenance task can be settled correctly.

For each order type, the system proposes a particular account assignment which has beendefined for the order type in your company. If the receiver is specified in the location and accountassignment data, the system automatically creates a settlement rule for the maintenance ordercontaining a distribution rule of 100 percent to the respective receiver.

Using the &XVWRPL]LQJ function, your system administrator determines whether the settlementrule must have been entered by the time the maintenance order is released, or only by the time itis completed.

Receiver Types [Page 108]

Defining the Settlement Rule [Page 109]

Budget Control Using Parallel Project Account Assignment [Page 111]

Page 108: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5HFHLYHU�7\SHV

��� -XQH�����

5HFHLYHU�7\SHVYou can settle a maintenance order to one of the following receiver types:

• Cost center

• Order

• Project

• Fixed asset

• G/L account

For details of how to determine the settlement rule, see Defining the Settlement Rule [Page 109].

Page 109: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'HILQLQJ�WKH�6HWWOHPHQW�5XOH

-XQH����� ���

'HILQLQJ�WKH�6HWWOHPHQW�5XOHAs a rule, the system determines the settlement rule for a maintenance order automatically fromthe object data.

If no object was entered in the maintenance order, or if you do not want the system to determinethe settlement rule automatically, you must enter it manually.

If you use background processing, the system maintains the current default rule.

0DLQWDLQLQJ�WKH�6HWWOHPHQW�5XOH�0DQXDOO\

To maintain the settlement rule of a maintenance order manually, carry out the following fivesteps:

1. Select the required maintenance order from the screen 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ with2UGHUV → &KDQJH or 2UGHUV → /LVW�HGLWLQJ → &KDQJH.

2. Choose +HDGHU → 6HWWOHPHQW�UXOH�→ 6HWWOHPHQW�UXOH.

There are two processing options:

– If a settlement rule has already been created for the maintenance order, you gostraight to the screen 0DLQWDLQ�6HWWOHPHQW�5XOH��/LVW.

Check the settlement rule:

– If it is satisfactory, return to the maintenance order.

– If you want to change or add to it, select the required receiver type in themenu 5HFHLYHUV.This takes you to the screen 0DLQWDLQ�6HWWOHPHQW�5XOH��'LVWULEXWLRQ�5XOHV,where you can make further entries.

– If no settlement rule exists yet for the maintenance order, the system displays adialog box, where you can confirm that you want to create a settlement rule. Youthen see a screen where you can maintain the settlement rule.

3. Make all the required entries in this screen, using the on-line help functions asnecessary.

4. Return to the maintenance order.

5. Save the maintenance order

&UHDWLQJ�D�'HIDXOW�5XOH

To create the current default rule for the maintenance order, proceed as follows:

1. Select the required maintenance order from the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen with2UGHUV → &KDQJH or 2UGHUV → /LVW�HGLWLQJ → &KDQJH.

2. In the order, choose +HDGHU → 6HWWOHPHQW�UXOH → &UHDWH.

There are the following processing options:

− All the data required for the default rule is maintained in your system. The systemautomatically creates a suitable settlement rule for the maintenance order.

If you want to display the default rule created, proceed as described above in“Maintaining the Settlement Rule Manually”.

Page 110: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'HILQLQJ�WKH�6HWWOHPHQW�5XOH

��� -XQH�����

− Some of the data that the system requires to create the settlement rule is missing.The system cannot create a default rule.

If you want to create the settlement rule manually, proceed as described above in“Maintaining the Settlement Rule Manually”.

− A settlement rule has already been created for the order.

In this case, the system does not create a new settlement rule. If you want tochange the settlement rule, proceed as described above under “Maintaining aSettlement Rule Manually”.

Page 111: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

%XGJHW�&RQWURO�8VLQJ�3DUDOOHO�3URMHFW�$FFRXQW�$VVLJQPHQW

-XQH����� ���

%XGJHW�&RQWURO�8VLQJ�3DUDOOHO�3URMHFW�$FFRXQW$VVLJQPHQWTo assist you in the budget control of your maintenance order, you can enter a project as abudget object in addition to the target account assignment for the settlement (for example, a costcenter). The link between plant maintenance and project management is established through themaintenance order: the plan value of the maintenance order is used for the project managementbudget control. However, the order is settled to the target account assignment.

This process is illustrated in the diagram below:

%XGJHW�&RQWURO

6HWWOHPHQW

3URMHFW�%������

2UGHU

������

3URMHFW%������

&RVW�FHQWHU

���

2UGHU������

3URMHFW%������

&RVW�FHQWHU���

2UGHU

������

3URMHFW%������

&RVW�FHQWHU

����

2UGHU

������

3URMHFW%������

&RVW�FHQWHU

����

0DLQWHQDQFH�3URMHFWV

���

5HFHLYHUFRVW�FHQWHU

����

5HFHLYHU

FRVW�FHQWHU

Page 112: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

2SHUDWLRQ�1HWZRUNLQJ�8VLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

��� -XQH�����

2SHUDWLRQ�1HWZRUNLQJ�8VLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

Most orders in Plant Maintenance are planned and executed without anyparticular relationship between the individual operations.

However, you should consider using relationships in the following cases:

• If you want to carry out extensive, detailed shutdown planning

• If specific operations need to be carried out in parallel, or in a particularsequence

• If you want to use a different sequence of operations to the normal sequenceautomatically used as standard

:KDW�DUH�5HODWLRQVKLSV"

A relationship describes the processing and temporal dependencies between two operations in amaintenance order. For example, it can specify that a particular operation can only start onceanother operation has been completed, or that an operation cannot be completed before anotheroperation has been completed. The operation becomes the predecessor or the successor ofanother operation through the relationship:

Relationships are characterized by two factors:

• Type

• Time interval

:KDW�DUH�5HODWLRQVKLSV�8VHG�IRU"

In order to be able to plan and execute extensive maintenance tasks efficiently, the sequenceand dependencies between the individual operations are very important. For this reason, youneed to be able to relate the operations of a maintenance order to one another in terms of time,in other words, to network them. You can do this using the networking and relationship functionsin the PM System.

When you use relationships in a maintenance order, you give the order the main properties of anetwork from the Project System (PS). For a more detailed description of networks, refer to 363URMHFW�6\VWHP.

You can network both the operations within a particular order and the operations of differentorders with one another.

If you create a maintenance order ZLWKRXW networking the operations using aparticular relationship, the system automatically schedules the operations as for astart-finish relationship with a time interval of zero.

Types of Relationship [Page 114]

Relationship Time Intervals [Page 116]

Creating Relationships [Page 117]

Changing Relationships [Page 126]

Page 113: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

2SHUDWLRQ�1HWZRUNLQJ�8VLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

-XQH����� ���

Displaying Relationships [Page 127]

Deleting Relationships [Page 128]

Carrying Out a Loop Analysis [Page 129]

Page 114: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

7\SHV�RI�5HODWLRQVKLS

��� -XQH�����

7\SHV�RI�5HODWLRQVKLSThe type of a relationship determines the way in which the individual operations are linked to oneanother. There are four types of relationship:

• Finish-start relationship

• Start-start relationship

• Finish-finish relationship

• Start-finish relationship

)LQLVK�6WDUW�5HODWLRQVKLS

The end of one operation is linked to the start of the subsequent operation.

Repairequipment

Installequipment

The operation “Install equipment” can only start once the operation “Repair equipment” has beencompleted.

6WDUW�6WDUW�5HODWLRQVKLS

The start of an operation is linked to the start of the subsequent operation.

Put upscaffolding Painting

The operation "Painting" can not start before theoperation "Put up scaffording" has started.

The operation “Painting” can only start once the operation “Put up scaffolding” has started.

)LQLVK�)LQLVK�5HODWLRQVKLS

The end of an operation is linked to the end of the subsequent operation.

Page 115: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

7\SHV�RI�5HODWLRQVKLS

-XQH����� ���

Painting Take downscaffording

The operation "Take down scaffording" can not finishuntil the operation "Painting" is finished.

The operation “Take down scaffolding” can only be completed once the operation “Painting” hasbeen completed.

6WDUW�)LQLVK�5HODWLRQVKLS

The start of one operation is linked to the end of the subsequent operation.

Acceptance

Put in operation

7h9

The operation "Put in operation" can not finish beforethe operation "Acceptance" has started.

The operation “Put in process” can only be completed once the operation “Acceptance” hasbegun.

In Plant Maintenance, the finish-start relationship with a time interval of zero isnormally used.

For more information on how to create relationships, see Creating Relationships [Page 117].

Page 116: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5HODWLRQVKLS�7LPH�,QWHUYDOV

��� -XQH�����

5HODWLRQVKLS�7LPH�,QWHUYDOVThe time interval is the time between two operations linked by a relationship.

Operation 0020 is linked to operation 0010 by a finish-start relationship with atime interval of two days. This means that operation 0020 can only start two daysafter operation 0010 finishes.

You can enter time intervals between linked operations in two ways:

• As positive or negative absolute values

You enter an absolute value, for example, 10 days. In the case of a finish-startrelationship, this means that operation 0020 starts 10 days before the completion ofoperation 0010.

• As a percentage of the duration of the preceding or subsequent operation

You enter a percentage, for example, 80 %. In the case of a start-finish relationship,where the preceding operation 0010 has a duration of 10 days, the subsequentoperation 0020 starts 8 days (= 80% of 10 days) after operation 0010 has finished.

For a detailed description of relationships, refer to 36�3URMHFW�6\VWHP.

For information on how to create relationships, see Creating Relationships [Page 117].

Page 117: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

-XQH����� ���

&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

Before you start networking order operations, you should consider whether thenormal finish-start relationship that the system creates automatically and which isvalid for a maintenance order without networks, is sufficient for yourrequirements.

You should only create networks between the individual operations, if you aresure that you want a GLIIHUHQW type of relationship between the individualoperations or parallel operations.

Note that you cannot network sub-operations using relationships.

Requirements for Creating Relationships [Page 118]

Creating Relationships Using the Graphics Function [Page 119]

Creating Relationships Using the List Function [Page 123]

Networking Several PM Orders Using Relationships [Page 124]

Page 118: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5HTXLUHPHQWV�IRU�&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

��� -XQH�����

5HTXLUHPHQWV�IRU�&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSVYou need the following before you can create and maintain relationships:

• A maintenance order must be created in the system.

• The maintenance order must have several operations.

If you require a different profile from the standard profile for the graphical display,you must define it using the &XVWRPL]LQJ function and assign it to the relevantsystem users.

For details of how to proceed when creating relationships, see Creating Relationships Using theGraphics Function [Page 119] and Creating Relationships Using the List Function [Page 123].

Page 119: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV�8VLQJ�WKH�*UDSKLFV�)XQFWLRQ

-XQH����� ���

&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV�8VLQJ�WKH�*UDSKLFV�)XQFWLRQTo create relationships using the graphics function, carry out the following twelve steps:

1. Call up the maintenance order with the operations you want to network in Create orChange mode.

2. Call up the operation overview of the maintenance order.

3. Choose *RWR → *UDSKLF → 1HWZRUN�VWUXFWXUH.

You see the SAP Graphics screen, containing all the operations you have created forthe maintenance order.

4. Choose &RQQHFW.

5. Click on the operation, IURP�ZKLFK you want to create the relationship and keep themouse-button depressed. The position of the mouse cursor determines the type ofrelationship created.

6. Draw a line with the cursor to the operation WR�ZKLFK you want to create therelationship. You see a broken line appear on the screen.

The position of the mouse cursor again determines the type of relationship created.

7. Release the mouse-button.

The system links the two operations with a line and writes in the type of relationship.The line always goes from the right-hand edge of the predecessor to the left-handedge of the successor, in other words, it only shows that a link exists: the type of linkis indicated in writing.

Example: Creating Relationships Using the Graphics Function [Page 121]

Once you have created the first relationship, the system automatically adjusts thescheduling for the maintenance order, and informs you of the change in an on-line message.

8. If you want to enter detail data for a relationship (for example, time interval), select therelationship and choose 'HWDLOV → 5HODWLRQVKLS�

Make all the necessary entries, using the on-line help functions as required.

From the graphic, you can call up the screens for internal and external processingof operation data (menu option ([WUDV), enter or change the data and then returnto the relationships graphic.

You can also create new operations in the graphic. For more information, seeCreating Operations Using the Graphics Function [Page 122].

9. Choose %DFN�to return to the graphic display.

10. Repeat steps 4 to 8 to create further relationships.

11. Choose *UDSKLF → ([LW�to return to the operation overview of the maintenance order.

12. Save the maintenance order�

Page 120: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV�8VLQJ�WKH�*UDSKLFV�)XQFWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

Page 121: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV�8VLQJ�WKH�*UDSKLFV�)XQFWLRQ

-XQH����� ���

([DPSOH��&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV�8VLQJ�WKH�*UDSKLFV�)XQFWLRQ

'HWHUPLQH�W\SH�RI�UHODWLRQVKLS�E\�SRVLWLRQLQJ�WKH�PRXVH�FXUVRU��/LQHV�GR�QRW�FRUUHVSRQGWR�JUDSKLF�RQ�VFUHHQ��

Page 122: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�2SHUDWLRQV�8VLQJ�WKH�*UDSKLFV�)XQFWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

&UHDWLQJ�2SHUDWLRQV�8VLQJ�WKH�*UDSKLFV�)XQFWLRQIf you are creating or changing relationships in the graphic function, and realize that a certainoperation has not yet been created, you can create it in the graphics function. To do this, carryout the following five steps:

1. In the graphic, choose ,QVHUWPRGH.

A template for an operation appears in the navigation area.

2. Click on the operation in the navigation area.

3. Position the cursor at the point where you want to enter the new operation, and clickthe left mouse-button.

The template for the operation appears at this position.

4. Select the new operation. Call up the editing screens for the operation using themenu option 0RGLI\� and enter all the relevant operation data.

5. As soon as you return to the graphics display, you can link the new operation to otheroperations using relationships.

Page 123: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV�8VLQJ�WKH�/LVW�)XQFWLRQ

-XQH����� ���

&UHDWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV�8VLQJ�WKH�/LVW�)XQFWLRQTo create relationships using the list function, carry out the following seven steps:

1. Call up the maintenance order with the operations you want to network in Create orChange mode.

2. Call up the operation overview of the maintenance order and select all the operationsfor which you want to create relationships.

Remember that you can only network operations, not sub-operations.

3. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → 5HODWLRQVKLS�

You reach the screen &KDQJH�30�2UGHU��5HODWLRQVKLS�/LVW. In the upper section of thescreen, below the order number, you see the first operation selected, from which youwant to create the relationship.

4. In the data block 5HODWLRQVKLSV, enter the following data:

− The RSHUDWLRQV, with which the above operation is to be networked

− The type of relationship

− If necessary, time interval data

If you want to network the operation with an operation from another maintenanceorder, you must also enter the number of this order.

From the list, you can call up the screens for internal and external processing ofoperation data (menu option ([WUDV), enter or change the data and then return tothe relationships list.

Once you have created the first relationship, the system automatically adjusts thescheduling for the maintenance order, and informs you of the change in an on-line message.

5. To call up the next operation selected, choose 2SHUDWLRQ → $GG�RSHUDWLRQV → 1H[WRSHUDWLRQ.

6. Proceed as described in step 4 for all further operations.

7. The system informs you when you have reached the last operation selected. You nowhave the following options:

− Return to the operation overview and call up further functions for the maintenanceorder. Then save the maintenance order.

− Save the maintenance order immediately.

Page 124: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

1HWZRUNLQJ�6HYHUDO�30�2UGHUV�8VLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

��� -XQH�����

1HWZRUNLQJ�6HYHUDO�30�2UGHUV�8VLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSVYou can link the operations of several maintenance orders using relationships. In this way, youcreate an operation network that links all the maintenance orders to one another.

The following options are available for networking several maintenance orders to one anotherusing relationships:

1. Enter all the relationships for the maintenance orders in the list.

To do this, proceed as described in Creating Relationships Using the List Function[Page 123].

2. Use the list only for the first relationships between different maintenance orders. Thenuse the graphics for all further relationships between the operations of the differentmaintenance orders.

To do this, proceed as described in “Using the List and Graphic Functions Together”.

8VLQJ�WKH�/LVW�DQG�*UDSKLF�)XQFWLRQV�7RJHWKHU

1. Call up the relevant maintenance orders in Create or Change mode.

2. Call up the operation overview of the maintenance order and select the operationsthat you want to network with operations from other maintenance orders.

Remember that you may not use sub-operations.

For every maintenance order that you want to include in the network, you needonly enter RQH operation to be networked. This operation forms the link to themaintenance order entered, and you can then enter any other relationshipsaffecting the order in the graphic.

3. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → 5HODWLRQVKLS�

You see the screen�&KDQJH�30�2UGHU��5HODWLRQVKLS�/LVW. In the upper section of thescreen, below the order number, you see the first operation selected, from which youwant to create the relationship.

4. In the data block 5HODWLRQVKLSV� enter the following data:

− The RSHUDWLRQV, with which the operation entered in the top part of the screen isto be networked

− The RUGHU�QXPEHU�RI�WKH�RSHUDWLRQV, with which the operation entered in thetop part of the screen is to be networked

− The type of relationship

− If necessary, time interval data

From the list, you can call up the screens for internal and external processing ofoperation data, enter or change the data and then return to the relationships list.

Page 125: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

1HWZRUNLQJ�6HYHUDO�30�2UGHUV�8VLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

-XQH����� ���

5. To call up the next operation selected, choose 2SHUDWLRQ → $GG�RSHUDWLRQV → 1H[WRSHUDWLRQ.

6. Proceed as described in step 4 for all further operations.

7. The system informs you when you have reached the last operation selected.

8. Call up the graphic with *RWR → *UDSKLF → 1HWZRUN�VWUXFWXUH and enter anyadditional relationships to those in the list of orders, as described in CreatingRelationships Using the Graphics Function [Page 119].

9. Save the maintenance order.

Page 126: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&KDQJLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

��� -XQH�����

&KDQJLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

Before making any changes to relationships, you should consider whether thechanges are really necessary, since they may affect the scheduling of the wholemaintenance order.

The following options are available for changing relationships:

• You can change the data of existing relationships.

• You can create or insert new relationships.

• You can delete relationships.

For details of how to delete relationships, see Deleting Relationships [Page 128].

To change relationships, call up the relevant maintenance order in the screen 30�3URFHVVLQJwith one of the following menu options:

• 2UGHUV → &KDQJH

• 2UGHUV → /LVW�HGLWLQJ → &KDQJH

To change relationships, proceed as for creating relationships (see Creating Relationships Usingthe Graphics Function [Page 119] or Creating Relationships Using the List Function [Page 123]).

Page 127: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'LVSOD\LQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

-XQH����� ���

'LVSOD\LQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSVTo display relationships, call up the relevant maintenance order in the screen 30�3URFHVVLQJwith one of the following options:

• 2UGHUV → 'LVSOD\

• 2UGHUV → /LVW�HGLWLQJ → 'LVSOD\

Then call up the relationships overview as described in Creating Relationships Using theGraphics Function [Page 119] or Creating Relationships Using the List Function [Page 123].

Page 128: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'HOHWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

��� -XQH�����

'HOHWLQJ�5HODWLRQVKLSV

If you delete the relationships in a maintenance order, the operations affected areremoved from the network structure. When you then schedule the maintenanceorder, the system proceeds on the assumption that the operations start at thesame time, independent of one another.

If you delete a relationship, you change the network structure. Before you delete relationships,you should therefore make sure that execution of the order has not yet begun.

To delete a relationship, carry out the following six steps:

1. Call up the maintenance order in which you want to delete a relationship from thescreen 30�3URFHVVLQJ with one of the following options:

− 2UGHUV → &KDQJH

− 2UGHUV → /LVW�HGLWLQJ → &KDQJH

2. Call up the operation overview of the maintenance order and select the operation forwhich you want to delete a relationship.

3. Call up either the graphic or the list of relationships:

7R�FDOO�XS�WKH���� 6HOHFW

Graphic *RWR → *UDSKLF → 1HWZRUN�VWUXFWXUH

List 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → 5HODWLRQVKLS

4. Select the relationships you want to delete.

5. Choose (GLW → 'HOHWH�

As soon as all the relationships have been deleted, the system automaticallyadjusts the scheduling for the maintenance order and displays an on-linemessage to inform you of this.

6. Save the change.

Page 129: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&DUU\LQJ�2XW�D�/RRS�$QDO\VLV

-XQH����� ���

&DUU\LQJ�2XW�D�/RRS�$QDO\VLVIn Plant Maintenance, you work on the assumption that the operations linked by relationshipswithin an operation network are carried out in consecutive order, and that individual operationsare not repeated. They must not form a ORRS� since this results in problems in scheduling theorder.

To avoid creating loops of this kind, the PM System provides a ORRS�DQDO\VLV�function. This is atool that checks whether an operation network contains a loop. You should always call up theloop analysis when you have created new relationships or changed existing ones.

To perform the loop analysis, proceed as follows:

1. Call up the maintenance order for which you want to carry out a loop analysis inCreate or Change mode.

2. Call up the operation overview of the maintenance order.

3. Call up the relationships graphic with�*RWR → *UDSKLF → 1HWZRUN�VWUXFWXUH�

The system displays the existing relationships in the graphic.

4. To start the loop analysis, select the menu path 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → /RRS�DQDO\VLV→ 3URFHHG�

The system checks all the relationships to see whether they form a loop. If it finds aloop, it displays all the relationships involved in the loop in a different color.

5. Select the relationship(s) causing the loop and choose (GLW → 'HOHWH�

If you want to delete the color highlight of the loop, choose &DQFHO.

6. Leave the graphic and save the change to the order.

Page 130: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6FKHGXOLQJ

��� -XQH�����

6FKHGXOLQJOnce you have planned a maintenance order with all its operations and components, you candefine the following scheduling data:

• The actual execution dates based on the dates specified in the maintenance orderand the time specifications in the operations

• The capacity requirement necessary for carrying out the maintenance order, basedon the dates in the operations

If you have maintained specific UHODWLRQVKLSV for a maintenance order, youshould note the following:

As soon as you create the first relationship for a maintenance order, the systemautomatically resets the scheduling from scheduling for orders withoutrelationships to scheduling for orders with relationships.

The reverse is also true: as soon as you delete all the relationships of amaintenance order, the system automatically resets the scheduling fromscheduling for orders with relationships to scheduling for orders withoutrelationships.

As long as scheduling for orders with relationships is valid, the system assumesthat operations for which you have not created relationships begin at the sametime, independent of one another.

Scheduling Requirements [Page 131]

Important Scheduling Data [Page 132]

Maintaining Scheduling Data [Page 133]

Scheduling the PM Order [Page 138]

Copying Project Dates When Assigning a PM Order [Page 143]

Displaying Order Start/End Dates [Page 145]

Displaying Operation Dates [Page 146]

Page 131: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6FKHGXOLQJ�5HTXLUHPHQWV

-XQH����� ���

6FKHGXOLQJ�5HTXLUHPHQWVA requirement for scheduling a maintenance order is that you have allocated a control key to theindividual operations in the maintenance order, which includes them in scheduling. Operationswhich do not have an appropriate control key allocated to them are automatically excluded forscheduling purposes.

For more information, see Specifying a Control Key [Page 64] and Maintaining Scheduling Data[Page 133].

For more information on scheduling, refer to the following topics:

• Scheduling a PM Order in the Header Data Screen or the Operation Overview [Page139]

• Displaying Order Start/End Dates [Page 145]

• Displaying Operation Dates [Page 146]

Page 132: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

,PSRUWDQW�6FKHGXOLQJ�'DWD

��� -XQH�����

,PSRUWDQW�6FKHGXOLQJ�'DWDIf you want the system to schedule a maintenance order, you must maintain the following data:

• Order VWDUW�HQG�GDWHV

• Order VFKHGXOLQJ�W\SH

Your system administrator defines the scheduling type for each order type duringsystem configuration. The system automatically proposes the scheduling typewhen you create a maintenance order, but you can change it if necessary.

• The FRQWURO�NH\ with a scheduling indicator for each operation

• The execution duration

Data relevant to scheduling is stored as a formula in the work center master data.If you want to schedule a maintenance order, the execution duration is usuallyused.

• The performing ZRUN�FHQWHU

For more information on scheduling, see the following topics:

• Maintaining Scheduling Data [Page 133]

• Scheduling a PM Order in the Header Data Screen or the Operation Overview [Page139]

• Displaying Order Start/End Dates [Page 145]

• Displaying Operation Dates [Page 146]

Page 133: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

0DLQWDLQLQJ�6FKHGXOLQJ�'DWD

-XQH����� ���

0DLQWDLQLQJ�6FKHGXOLQJ�'DWDTo maintain the scheduling data for a maintenance order, select the order in Create or Changemode and maintain the relevant data as described below.

30�2UGHU�6WDUW�(QG�'DWHV

Maintain start/end dates in the central header data screen of the maintenance order, using themenu path *RWR → &HQWUDO�KHDGHU.

The system schedules all the operations of a maintenance order in consecutive numerical orderfor these dates.

30�2UGHU�6FKHGXOLQJ�7\SH

The scheduling type determines whether and how a maintenance order is to be scheduled:

,I�D�PDLQWHQDQFH�RUGHU��� 7KLV�PHDQV�WKDW���

Is to be scheduled forwards, Order execution is to start on the start date specified.

Parameter entry: Start date

You can use this scheduling type with or without a timeof day.

Is to be scheduled backwards, Order execution is to finish on the end date specified.

Parameter entry: End date

You can use this scheduling type with or without a timeof day.

Is to be scheduled for the currentdate,

The maintenance order is to be carried out that sameday.

Parameter entries: Start and end dates

Is not to be scheduled, You do not need to enter any scheduling data.

Parameter entry: None

Graphic: Overview of Scheduling Types [Page 135]

Maintain the scheduling type in the header detail data screen of the maintenance order. Youaccess this screen from the central header data screen with +HDGHU�→�+HDGHU�GHWDLO�GDWD.

&RQWURO�.H\

Using the control key, which you specify for each operation in the overview screen or the detailscreen, the system determines whether or not an operation is to be included in scheduling.

You can maintain the control key for an operation in the maintenance order in two ways:

1. In the operation overview of the maintenance order, which you access with *RWR →2SHUDWLRQ�RYHUYLHZ

Page 134: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

0DLQWDLQLQJ�6FKHGXOLQJ�'DWD

��� -XQH�����

2. In the detail screen of the relevant operation, which you access from the operationoverview with 2SHUDWLRQ → ,QWHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ�or 2SHUDWLRQ → ([WHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ

([HFXWLRQ�'XUDWLRQ

Each operation that you want to include in scheduling must have an execution duration,according to the formula entered in the work center.

You maintain the execution duration in the operation detail screen of each operation, which youselect using 2SHUDWLRQ → ,QWHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ�or 2SHUDWLRQ → ([WHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ. You can dothis in two ways:

1. You have the system automatically determine the execution duration on the basis ofother specifications in the block 'HIDXOW�YDOXHV in the detail screen.

2. You enter the execution duration manually.

The examples below illustrate these options:

Example: Automatic Calculation of Execution Duration [Page 136]

Example: Entering the Execution Duration Manually [Page 137]

6FKHGXOLQJ�5HVWULFWLRQV

You can enter scheduling restrictions for an operation, specifying, for example, that an operationshould not be processed before a certain date or time of day.

You enter these restrictions in the scheduling screen of the individual operation, which youaccess from the operation overview by selecting the operation and the menu option 2SHUDWLRQ →2SHUDWLRQ�GDWHV.

3HUIRUPLQJ�:RUN�&HQWHU

Using data from the master record of the performing work center, the system calculates the startand end times for carrying out the operation, on the basis of the shift schedule.

You can maintain the performing work center for an operation in the maintenance order in twoways:

1. In the operation overview of the maintenance order, which you access with *RWR →2SHUDWLRQ�RYHUYLHZ

2. In the detail screen of the operation, which you access from the operation overviewwith 2SHUDWLRQ → ,QWHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ�or 2SHUDWLRQ → ([WHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ

For details of how to schedule a maintenance order, see Scheduling a PM Order in the HeaderData Screen or the Operation Overview [Page 139].

For information on assigning a maintenance order to a project and copying the project dates tothe order, see Copying Project Dates When Assigning a PM Order [Page 143].

Page 135: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

0DLQWDLQLQJ�6FKHGXOLQJ�'DWD

-XQH����� ���

*UDSKLF��2YHUYLHZ�RI�6FKHGXOLQJ�7\SHV

)RUZDUG�VFKHGXOLQJ�

%DFNZDUG�VFKHGXOLQJ�

&XUUHQW�GDWH�VFKHGXOLQJ�

W

(QGGDWH

&XUUHQWGDWH

6WDUWGDWH

([HFXWLRQ�RI30�RUGHU

([HFXWLRQ�RI30�RUGHU

([HFXWLRQ�RI30�RUGHU

Page 136: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

0DLQWDLQLQJ�6FKHGXOLQJ�'DWD

��� -XQH�����

([DPSOH��$XWRPDWLF�&DOFXODWLRQ�RI�([HFXWLRQ�'XUDWLRQ

$FWLRQ (QWU\

Enter the activity type for the operation in the field $FWLYLW\�W\SH: SP�K

Enter the time required to perform the operation in the field :RUN: ���K

Enter the number of persons who are to perform the work in the field 1XPEHU: �

Enter the proportion of working time that the persons can use to perform theoperation as a percentage in the field 3HUFHQW:

���

Specify the key for calculating the execution duration in the field &DOFXODWLRQ�NH\: �

Press ENTER. The system calculates the execution duration and enters it in the field1RUPDO�GXUDWLRQ:

��K

This entry method is suitable if the entries in the fields 1XPEHU and 1RUPDO�GXUDWLRQ are inverselyproportional to one another:

:RUN���1XPEHU� �1RUPDO�GXUDWLRQ

Page 137: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

0DLQWDLQLQJ�6FKHGXOLQJ�'DWD

-XQH����� ���

([DPSOH��(QWHULQJ�WKH�([HFXWLRQ�'XUDWLRQ�0DQXDOO\

$FWLRQ (QWU\

Enter the activity type for the operation in the field $FWLYLW\�W\SH: SP�K

Enter the execution duration in the field 1RUPDO�GXUDWLRQ: ��K

This entry method is suitable if the number of persons and the duration are not in any proportionto one another.

Page 138: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6FKHGXOLQJ�WKH�30�2UGHU

��� -XQH�����

6FKHGXOLQJ�WKH�30�2UGHUUsing the &XVWRPL]LQJ function, your system administrator can configure the system so that itschedules the maintenance order each time you save it. However, you can also have the systemschedule the maintenance order on a test basis at the planning stage, to see whether the datacalculated is suitable. You can do this in various ways, depending on the type of planning youuse:

• Scheduling a PM Order in the Header Data Screen or the Operation Overview [Page139]

• Scheduling a PM Order in the Structure Graphic [Page 140]

• Scheduling Networked PM Orders [Page 141]

Page 139: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6FKHGXOLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�LQ�WKH�+HDGHU�'DWD�6FUHHQ�RU�WKH�2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ

-XQH����� ���

6FKHGXOLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�LQ�WKH�+HDGHU�'DWD�6FUHHQ�RU�WKH2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZTo schedule a maintenance order in the header data screen or the operation overview, carry outthe following two steps:

1. Enter all the necessary scheduling data in the header data screen, the operationoverview and the detail data screens of the maintenance order, as described inMaintaining Scheduling Data [Page 133].

2. In the header data screen or the operation overview, 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → 6FKHGXOH.

The system schedules the order.

If the system is unable to carry out scheduling, you can display the reason for this in alog, with the menu option *RWR → 3URWRFROV → 6FKHGXOLQJ.

The system does not take account of date entries for sub-operations duringscheduling. However, you can specify sub-operation dates by entering the timeinterval with reference to the operation in the sub-operation date screen.

For information on how to display order start/end dates, see Displaying Order Start/End Dates[Page 145].

For information on how to display operation dates, see Displaying Operation Dates [Page 146].

Page 140: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6FKHGXOLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�LQ�WKH�6WUXFWXUH�*UDSKLF

��� -XQH�����

6FKHGXOLQJ�D�30�2UGHU�LQ�WKH�6WUXFWXUH�*UDSKLFTo schedule a maintenance order, in the structure graphic, perform the following steps:

1. Select the maintenance order in Change mode.

2. Enter all the necessary scheduling data in the header data screen, the operationoverview and the detail data screens of the maintenance order as described inMaintaining Scheduling Data [Page 133].

3. In the operation overview, choose *RWR → *UDSKLF → 1HWZRUN�VWUXFWXUH.

You see the structure graphic, containing the operations of the order and itsnetworked orders and any relations created between the operations.

The system schedules the work order you selected; it does not schedule the otherwork orders that are displayed.

4. Call up the graphic scheduling function with 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → 6FKHGXOH.

The system schedules the order(s) and displays an on-line message to inform youthat scheduling has been completed.

5. You can display the dates determined in the following two ways:

– You can display the operations in the graphic in enlarged format. In the graphic,choose 6HWWLQJV�→�'LVSOD\�RSWLRQV. The system displays a dialog box, whereyou select the mode of representation ODUJH�

Press &RQWLQXH. The graphic display now also contains the dates for eachoperation.

– Select the required operations with (GLW → 6HOHFW → �UHTXLUHG�RSWLRQ! and thenchoose 'HWDLOV → 'DWHV.

The system displays the dates for the selected operations.

Return to the graphic with *RWR → %DFN�

6. Save the maintenance order.

Page 141: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6FKHGXOLQJ�1HWZRUNHG�30�2UGHUV

-XQH����� ���

6FKHGXOLQJ�1HWZRUNHG�30�2UGHUVThe following options are available for scheduling orders from an order network consisting ofseveral maintenance orders:

You can schedule:

• All the maintenance orders in an order network at the same time.

• An individual maintenance order belonging to an order network.

6FKHGXOLQJ�DOO�WKH�30�2UGHUV�LQ�D�1HWZRUN�DW�WKH�6DPH�7LPH

To schedule all the maintenance orders in an order network at the same time, carry out thefollowing seven steps:

1. From the SAP menu, choose /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFHSURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → 2UGHU�VFKHGXOLQJ.

You see the initial total network scheduling screen for maintenance orders.

2. Enter one of the maintenance orders that is part of the network you want to schedule.

3. Choose (GLW → 6FKHGXOH.

You see the screen with the valid scheduling data.

4. Make all the necessary entries or changes.

5. Start the scheduling function with 2UGHU�VFKHGXOLQJ → 3URFHHG.

The system schedules all the maintenance orders that are networked with the orderyou entered in the initial screen. Scheduling is carried out for the dates that youentered in the 6FKHGXOLQJ block.

The system displays an on-line message to inform you that scheduling has beencompleted.

6. You can call up the following display functions to check the data calculated:

− 'DWHV�HUURU ORJ

If the system is unable to carry out the scheduling function, you can display thereason for this in a log, with the menu option *RWR → 3URWRFROV → 6FKHGXOLQJ.

− &RPSDULVRQ�RI�WKH�ROG�DQG�QHZ�GDWHV

To display both the old dates for the individual orders and operations of the ordernetwork, and the new ones calculated by the system, choose *RWR → 'DWHRYHUYLHZ�ROG�QHZ.

7. Save the order network scheduling.

6FKHGXOLQJ�DQ�,QGLYLGXDO�30�2UGHU�LQ�DQ�2UGHU�1HWZRUN

When you schedule an individual maintenance order that is included byrelationships in an order network, the system takes the dates of the othermaintenance orders into account for the order to be scheduled. However, it doesnot change the dates of the other orders.

Page 142: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6FKHGXOLQJ�1HWZRUNHG�30�2UGHUV

��� -XQH�����

To schedule an individual maintenance order that is included in an order network byrelationships, proceed as described in one of the following topics:

• Scheduling a PM Order in the Header Data Screen or the Operation Overview [Page139]

• Scheduling a PM Order in the Structure Graphic [Page 140]

Page 143: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&RS\LQJ�3URMHFW�'DWHV�:KHQ�$VVLJQLQJ�D�30�2UGHU

-XQH����� ���

&RS\LQJ�3URMHFW�'DWHV�:KHQ�$VVLJQLQJ�D�30�2UGHUWhen you assign a maintenance order to a project, this means that the project dates representthe master start/end dates. The order can be assigned to a WBS element or a network operationof the project. If you assign the work order to both a WBS element and a network, the system willalways transfer the dates of the network operation.

7R�DVVLJQ�D�PDLQWHQDQFH�RUGHU�WR�D�SURMHFW�DQG�FRS\�WKH�GDWHV�IURP�LW��FDUU\�RXW�WKHIROORZLQJ�VL[�VWHSV�

1. Enter all the necessary scheduling data in the header data screen, the operationoverview and the detail data screens of the maintenance order as described inMaintaining Scheduling Data [Page 133].

2. Call up the header extra data screen with +HDGHU → $VVLJQPHQWV�→ *HQHUDO.

3. Enter the WBS element or the operation of the network to which the maintenanceorder is assigned and press ENTER.

The system displays a dialog box.

4. Your entry determines how you proceed:

– If you have entered a WBS element, you can decide whether you want to copythe WBS element dates for the maintenance order or not.

If you FRS\�WKH�SURMHFW�GDWHV, the system changes the order start/end dates inthe block 'DWHV to the project start/end dates.

If you do QRW�FRS\�WKH�SURMHFW�GDWHV, the original maintenance order datesremain valid for scheduling.

– If you have entered an operation of a network, the system automatically takesover the dates. You may also transfer the WBS element, the profit center, thebusiness area and the priority from the operation to the work order.

You can take over the dates that have changed in the project system simply bypressing the function key for the update of project dates. This function key isalso available in the selection function for work orders. Thus you are able toupdate the dates of several project-related or network-related work orders inone processing step.

5. Return to the header data screen and schedule the maintenance order with the menuoption 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → 6FKHGXOH.

If the system cannot carry out scheduling, you can display the reason for this in a log,with the menu option *RWR → 3URWRFROV → 6FKHGXOLQJ.

The system does not take account of date entries for sub-operations duringscheduling. However, you can specify sub-operation dates by entering the timeinterval with reference to the operation in the sub-operation date screen.

6. Save the maintenance order.

Page 144: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&RS\LQJ�3URMHFW�'DWHV�:KHQ�$VVLJQLQJ�D�30�2UGHU

��� -XQH�����

For information on how to display the operation dates calculated, see Displaying Operation Dates[Page 146].

Page 145: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'LVSOD\LQJ�2UGHU�6WDUW�(QG�'DWHV

-XQH����� ���

'LVSOD\LQJ�2UGHU�6WDUW�(QG�'DWHVThe order start/end dates are displayed in the header data screen of the maintenance order. Yougenerally enter these dates yourself as parameters for scheduling the operations.

If you only entered one start/end date for the maintenance order, the system automaticallycalculates the second date during scheduling:

,I��� 7KHQ���

You schedule forwards, The system uses the calculated end date.

You schedule backwards, The system uses the calculated start date.

If you selected a scheduling type with time of day, the system calculates the second start/enddate with the time.

Both the start/end dates and the estimated and actual dates for the maintenance order aredisplayed in the header extra data screen. You can call this up with +HDGHU�→�+HDGHU�GHWDLOGDWD.

For information on how to display the operation dates, see Displaying Operation Dates [Page146].

Page 146: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'LVSOD\LQJ�2SHUDWLRQ�'DWHV

��� -XQH�����

'LVSOD\LQJ�2SHUDWLRQ�'DWHVYou can display the operation dates that the system calculated during scheduling for amaintenance order and its operations as follows:

1. Select the operation overview of the maintenance order.

2. Select the operation for which you want to display the scheduling dates and thenchoose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2SHUDWLRQ�GDWHV.

You see the screen 2SHUDWLRQ�'DWHV, containing the dates and times calculated forthe selected operation.

For information on how to display the order start/end dates, see Displaying Order Start/EndDates [Page 145].

Page 147: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

5HYLVLRQ�$VVLJQPHQW

-XQH����� ���

5HYLVLRQ�$VVLJQPHQWRevisions are often planned in a company for certain periods during the year of duringproduction. During these periods, certain technical system parts or even the entire company mayshut down, allowing a large proportion of due maintenance tasks to be carried out.

When planning maintenance orders, you determine (amongst other things) that certain taskswould be carried out most conveniently during the next revision. You assign these orders to oneof the revisions which are managed in the system.

$VVLJQLQJ�DQ�,QGLYLGXDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�WR�D�5HYLVLRQ

You can assign an individual maintenance order to a revision by entering the revision in theheader data screen of the maintenance order.

The basic dates of the maintenance order are adjusted to those of the revision, and the systemreschedules the order.

$VVLJQLQJ�6HYHUDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV�WR�D�5HYLVLRQ�6LPXOWDQHRXVO\

You can assign several maintenance orders to a revision simultaneously by performing thefollowing four steps:

1. Create a maintenance order list (see Working with Lists [Ext.]).

2. Select the required maintenance orders in the list.

3. Choose 2UGHU�→�5HYLVLRQ�→�$VVLJQ�UHYLVLRQ�

The system displays a dialog box, in which you enter specifications regarding therevision to which you want to assign the selected orders.

4. Press &RQWLQXH�

The selected maintenance orders are now assigned to the revision entered. Thesystem adjusts the basic dates of the maintenance orders to those of the revision andreschedules the orders.

8SGDWLQJ�5HYLVLRQ�'DWHV�IRU�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

The dates of a revision may sometimes be moved. To adjust maintenance orders, which wereassigned to a moved revision, to the new dates, perform the following three steps:

1. Create a maintenance order list (see Working with Lists [Ext.]).

2. Select the required maintenance orders in the list.

3. Choose 2UGHU�→�5HYLVLRQ�→�5HIUHVK�GDWHV�

The system readjusts the basic dates of the selected maintenance orders to those ofthe revision entered and reschedules the orders.

Page 148: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

2WKHU�2UGHU�$VVLJQPHQWV

��� -XQH�����

2WKHU�2UGHU�$VVLJQPHQWV

8VHYou can use these functions to assign an order to different objects.

)HDWXUHV

$VVLJQPHQW�IRU�,QYHVWPHQW�3URJUDP

You use this constellation mainly to contol the maintenance object generally independently ofinvestments. The budget of an investment program can be divided down to the order level. Eachorder is then considered individually.

You assign maintenance orders, in which capital investment measures are planned in detail anddescribed, to investment programs. In this way, you can manage the investment budget across arange of measures.

For more information about investment management, see IM - Investment Management [Ext.].

$VVLJQPHQW�IRU�)XQGV�0DQDJHPHQW

You can assign maintenance orders to terms from funds management. For this, the accountassignment terms of the order are linked with those of funds management.

For more information about funds management, see FI - Funds Management [Ext.].

$VVLJQPHQW�IRU�5HDO�(VWDWH�2EMHFW

You can assign maintenance orders to real estate objects to clarify exactly the costs for theseobjects with regard to Plant Maintenance.

For more information about real estate management, see IS-RE - Real Estate [Ext.].

$VVLJQPHQW�IRU�-RLQW�9HQWXUH

In order to divide risks, costs and revenues for a joint venture also with regard to PlantMaintenance, you can also assign maintenance orders to a joint venture.

Page 149: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

(QWU\�RI�3DUWQHU�'DWD

-XQH����� ���

(QWU\�RI�3DUWQHU�'DWD

8VHYou can use this function to enter partner data for the order.

You enter a partner on the partner data screen of the order. Here, you can enter the partner andtheir functions for the PM order, for example, vendors, customers or contact persons that areimportant for the order.

You can only call up this screen if a partner determination procedure has beendefined in your system using the Customizing functions.

6HH�DOVR�

• Entering Partner Data [Page 150]

• Partners in PM/SM Processing [Ext.]

Page 150: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(QWHULQJ�3DUWQHU�'DWD

��� -XQH�����

(QWHULQJ�3DUWQHU�'DWD1. From the order screen, choose +HDGHU�→�3DUWQHU.

You reach the partner data screen for the order. If partner data already exists for thisorder (for example, because a partner is assigned to the equipment entered), thepartner function, number and name/description are displayed here.

2. If necessary, check the partner information already entered. If you want to see moreinformation about the partners displayed, call up the corresponding menu option.

3. If necessary, enter additional partner information. You can use the on-line help forthis.

4. Save the order with the new or changed partner data.

Page 151: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

2UGHU�5HOHDVH

-XQH����� ���

2UGHU�5HOHDVH

8VHWhen you have finished planning the maintenance order with all the necessary specifications,you release it for processing. Only then can the employees start on the activities described.

For information on how to release a maintenance order, see Releasing an Order [Page 153].

,QWHJUDWLRQThe diagram below shows how order release is incorporated in maintenance processing:

0DOIXQFWLRQ�

0DOIXQFWLRQ30�2UGHU

3ODQQLQJ

��'DPDJH�ORFDWLRQ

��:RUN�VWHSV��:RUN�FHQWHUV��&RQWURO�NH\��0DWHULDO

5HOHDVH

30�2UGHU

([HFXWLRQ

��:RUN�FHQWHUV��0DWHULDO�LVVXH

��&RPSOHWLRQ

UHSRUW

���FRQILUPDWLRQ

You can only perform the following activities once you have released an order:

• Printing shop papers

• Issuing material

• Posting goods receipt

• Entering confirmations of times required for the job

• Completing the maintenance task

In many cases, the execution of the maintenance task also includes the technical confirmation.However, the maintenance order does not have to be released before the confirmation can beentered.

Before making any changes to a maintenance order which has been released,you should consider that work may already have started. You must therefore passon any changes to the persons actually carrying out the job.

&RPELQDWLRQ�RI�5HOHDVH�ZLWK�3ULQWLQJ�RI�6KRS�3DSHUV

Since in many companies the work steps 5HOHDVH and�3ULQW�VKRS�SDSHUV�follow directly afterone another, the PM System allows you to initiate these two steps using a single system function.

See Putting an Order in Process [Page 154]

,PPHGLDWH�5HOHDVH�IRU�$XWRPDWLFDOO\�&UHDWHG�2UGHUV

In the case of maintenance orders automatically created by the system, you have the option ofreleasing the created maintenance orders immediately.

See Releasing Automatically Created Orders Immediately [Page 155]

Page 152: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

2UGHU�5HOHDVH

��� -XQH�����

)HDWXUHVWhen you release an order, it has the status 5(/($6('. This status is a prerequisite forexecuting the dependent functions outlined above.

When you release an order, the system checks the availability of the material and productionresources/tools and the necessary permits. Finally for the release, the material reservations aremade available for materials planning and for withdrawal and the purchase requisitions arecreated.

)RU�UHIXUELVKPHQW�RUGHUV��WKH�IROORZLQJ�DOVR�DSSOLHV�

After it has been released, you can no longer change certain entries in the refurbishment order:

• The total quantity of repairable spares to be refurbished and its management on theheader data screen of the order

• All the entries in the section 5HIXUELVKPHQW in the header data screen of the order

• The item for the repairable spares to be refurbished in the component list of the order

Page 153: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

5HOHDVLQJ�DQ�2UGHU

-XQH����� ���

5HOHDVLQJ�DQ�2UGHU1. Select the maintenance order you want to release with 2UGHUV → &KDQJH in the

0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen.

2. Choose 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → 5HOHDVH in the header data screen or the operationoverview.

3. Save the maintenance order.

If you have released a maintenance order to be carried out, and subsequentlyenter further operations for it, these are automatically released as well.

Page 154: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

3XWWLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�LQ�3URFHVV

��� -XQH�����

3XWWLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�LQ�3URFHVV1. Select the maintenance order you want to put in process with 2UGHUV → &KDQJH in

the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ�screen.

2. Choose 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → 3XW�LQ�SURFHVV in the header data screen or theoperation overview.

The system displays a dialog box.

3. Enter whether you want to print shop papers for the order as well as releasing it. Youcan display a separate dialog box for the print option, in which you can check and, ifnecessary, change the printing specifications set in the system.

4. Press &RQWLQXH.

Depending on the entries you made in the dialog box, the system continues in one ofthe ways described below:

− The system displays a dialog box for printing shop papers, from where youproceed as described in Printing/Faxing Shop Papers [Page 200].

− The system displays an on-line message, informing you that the PM order hasbeen released, saved and, if applicable, printed.

You can define the process flow for the function 3XW�SURFHVV�LQ�RUGHU specificallyfor the individual user. To find out how to do this, see Default Values for the Order[Page 25].

Page 155: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

5HOHDVLQJ�$XWRPDWLFDOO\�&UHDWHG�2UGHUV�,PPHGLDWHO\

-XQH����� ���

5HOHDVLQJ�$XWRPDWLFDOO\�&UHDWHG�2UGHUV�,PPHGLDWHO\

8VHYou have the option of releasing maintenance orders immediately when they are created. Thisoption is available where maintenance orders were created automatically by the system, that is,for maintenance orders:

• Which were created using a maintenance plan (maintenance call)

• Which were created from a maintenance notification (using 1RWLILFDWLRQ→�)XQFWLRQV→OUGHU→�&UHDWH or 1RWLILFDWLRQ→�)XQFWLRQV→�OUGHU→�&UHDWH�QRWLILFDWLRQ)

3UHUHTXLVLWHVTo release these orders immediately when they are created, the system administration must setthe indicator 5HOHDVH�LPPHGLDWHO\�for the required order types, using the Customizing function.

Page 156: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�7DVN�/LVWV

��� -XQH�����

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�7DVN�/LVWV

8VHYou use maintenance task lists (PM task lists) to plan maintenance tasks in the maintenanceorder. Maintenance task lists are used as a reference and an input tool when processingmaintenance orders and considerably reduce the time required during work scheduling.

The complete or partial planning of maintenance orders using maintenance task lists is advisableif:

• The activities to be planned involve work which must be executed in a particular wayand for which the same materials are always required

• The activities to be planned involve work which consists of a combination of constant,recurring work steps and one-time, individual activities

Some manufacturers will provide task lists for maintaining the technical systems they supply,while many companies create their own internal task lists based on previous experience.

3UHUHTXLVLWHVBefore you can use maintenance task lists for planning in the maintenance order, they must havealready been created in the system by your maintenance planner and must describe certainrecurring tasks completely.

For information on which task list categories are available and how to create maintenance tasklists in the system, see PM - Maintenance Task Lists [Ext.].

)HDWXUHV• You can include the following maintenance task lists in maintenance orders:

− Object-specific task lists

− General maintenance task lists

− Configurable general maintenance task lists

• You can include one or more maintenance task lists in the maintenance order.

• You can include the same maintenance task list several times in a maintenanceorder.

• You can combine maintenance task lists with manually entered operations in themaintenance order.

• The following selection functions are available for including task lists. These functionscan also sometimes be combined:

− Complete transfer

− Operation selection

− Work center selection

− Renumbering of operations

− One-time, complet inclusion

Page 157: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�7DVN�/LVWV

-XQH����� ���

− Operation sorting

You can find out how to use task lists during order planning in Order Planning UsingMaintenance Task Lists [Page 158].

Page 158: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

2UGHU�3ODQQLQJ�8VLQJ�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVN�/LVWV

��� -XQH�����

2UGHU�3ODQQLQJ�8VLQJ�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVN�/LVWV

3XUSRVHYou perform the steps of this process when you want to use maintenance task lists for planningin the maintenance order.

3URFHVV�)ORZ1. You create a maintenance order.

See Creating a PM Order [Page 29].

2. You select a task list which you want to use for planning the maintenance order, andinclude it directly or using the selection.

In addition, the selection functions are also available. If you want, for example, tochoose certain operations from the task lists or you want to renumber.

See:

– Including a Task List Directly [Page 169]

– Selecting and Including an Object-Specific Task List [Page 170]

– Selecting and Including a General Maintenance Task List [Page 171]

– Selection Functions [Page 159]

– Setting Selection Functions [Page 168]

3. You adapt the included task list operations to the individual requirements of themaintenance order. You can, for example, change the work center or add additionaloperations.

See Adapting a Task List [Page 173].

4. During the planning (but also at a later date), you can display which maintenance tasklists are included in a maintenance order.

To find out how to do this, see Displaying Included Maintenance Task Lists [Page174].

Page 159: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HOHFWLRQ�)XQFWLRQV

-XQH����� ���

6HOHFWLRQ�)XQFWLRQV

8VHYou use the selection functions for including maintenance task lists in maintenance orders. Theyfacilitate:

• The task list and operation selection

• The sorting of operations in the maintenance order

3UHUHTXLVLWHVTo be able to use the selection functions for including task lists, you must define a valid functioncombination in your system. Note the different options provided in the system for the combinationof different selection functions:

2SHUDWLRQVHOHFWLRQ

:RUNFHQWHUVHOHFWLRQ

5HQXPEHU 2QH�WLPH�FRPSOHWHLQFOXVLRQ

2SHUDWLRQVRUWLQJ

2SHUDWLRQVHOHFWLRQ

_ can can can can

:RUN�FHQWHUVHOHFWLRQ

must _ can can can

5HQXPEHU can can _ can not possible

2QH�WLPHFRPSOHWHLQFOXVLRQ

can can can _ can

2SHUDWLRQVRUWLQJ

must can not possible must _

In general, you only define the selection functions once in the system. Therefoe, itis very important that you orient yourself towards the usual procedure used withinyour company for selecting and including task lists and operations.

If you do QRW activate a selection function, the maintenance task list selected byyou for the maintenance order is copied completely immediately unchanged intothe maintenance order.

)HDWXUHVThe following functions are available:

2SHUDWLRQ�6HOHFWLRQ

Page 160: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HOHFWLRQ�)XQFWLRQV

��� -XQH�����

If this function is active, the system displays a dialog box after you have selected the requiredtask list. You can now select the task list operations required by you for transferring into themaintenance order. (Example [Page 162])

You can only create orders with included task lists by batch input if the indicator2SHUDWLRQ�VHOHFWLRQ is switched off and you include the task list directly [Page169].

For more information about the batch input in Plant Maintenance, see thedocumentation for the program RIIBIP00.

:RUN�&HQWHU�6HOHFWLRQ

If this function is active, the system displays a dialog box after you have selected the requiredtask list. Here you have a choice of all the work centers contained in the task list. After you haveselected those required, the system only provides those operations which should be executed bythe selected work center. (Example [Page 163])

Note the following:

• This function can only be used in conjunction with the function 2SHUDWLRQVHOHFWLRQ.

• If a sub-operation should be executed by the selected work center, but theaccompanying lower-level operation by a different work center, then ERWKoperations are displayed.

• You can also use this function to change the work center for certainoperations when selecting task list operations for a maintenance order.(Example [Page 167])

5HQXPEHULQJ

If this function is active, the system allocates an unbroken series of new numbers to theoperations after you have selected the required task list. The gap between the individualnumbers corresponds to the increments you specified. (Example [Page 164])

You use this function in particular if you copy several task lists for an order usingthe operation selection and the highest possible operation number might beoverwritten.

2QH�WLPH�&RPSOHWH�,QFOXVLRQ

If this function is active, a task list selected by you can only be included once in the same order.

Note the following:

• In combination with the function 2SHUDWLRQ�VHOHFWLRQ, this function ensuresthat for each task list selection the only operations provided are those which

Page 161: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HOHFWLRQ�)XQFWLRQV

-XQH����� ���

have not yet been included in the order you are currently processing.(Example [Page 165])

• The operations of the second and every subsequent selection are place in theorder EHKLQG the previously selected operations.

2SHUDWLRQ�6RUWLQJ

If this function is active, the operations you select for an order with the multiple selection of thesame order are copied in such a way that they remain in the same sequence as in the task list.(Example [Page 166])

It is only advisable to use this function if the functions 2SHUDWLRQ�VHOHFWLRQ and2QH�WLPH�FRPSOHWH�LQFOXVLRQ�have also been selected.

You are QRW allowed to choose the 5HQXPEHULQJ function.

6HH�DOVR�

Setting Selection Functions [Page 168]

Page 162: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

([DPSOH��2SHUDWLRQ�6HOHFWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

([DPSOH��2SHUDWLRQ�6HOHFWLRQTask list 1234567, “Inspection”:

7DVN�OLVWRSHUDWLRQV

6HOHFWLRQ 7DVN�OLVW�RSHUDWLRQV�LQ�WKH�RUGHU

����Renewspark plug

; ����Renew spark plug

����Oil change

����Renew oilfilter

; ����Renew oil filter

����Renew airfilter

����Checkbrakes

; ����Check brakes

����Checkheadlampalignment

Page 163: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

([DPSOH��:RUN�&HQWHU�6HOHFWLRQ

-XQH����� ���

([DPSOH��:RUN�&HQWHU�6HOHFWLRQThe work center “Mechanics” was chosen for the work center selection:

2SHUDWLRQV�VXE�RSHUDWLRQV�ZLWKWKH�DFFRPSDQ\LQJ�ZRUN�FHQWHUVLQ�WKH�WDVN�OLVW

6HOHFWLRQ�RI�RSHUDWLRQV�SURYLGHG�EDVHG�RQ�ZRUNFHQWHU�VHOHFWLRQ

0010 Mechanics 0010 Mechanics

0020 Electrics 0020 Electrics

0020 0010 Mechanics 0020 0010 Mechanics

0020 0020 Electrics

0030 Mechanics 0030 Mechanics

0040 Electrics

Page 164: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

([DPSOH��5HQXPEHULQJ

��� -XQH�����

([DPSOH��5HQXPEHULQJThe following two task lists are included with the operation selection:

7DVN�OLVW�� 6HOHFWLRQ 7DVN�OLVW�� 6HOHFWLRQ

Operation 0030 ; Operation 0040

Operation 0060 Operation 0080 ;

Operation 0090 Operation 0120

Operation 0120 ; Operation 0160 ;

Operation 0150 Operation 0200

For a set increment of ����, the system renumbers the operations included in the order asfollows:

7DVN�OLVW 2ULJLQDO�RSHUDWLRQ�QXPEHU 1HZ�RSHUDWLRQ�QXPEHU�LQ�WKH�RUGHU

Task list 1 0030 0010

0120 0020

Task list 2 0080 0030

0160 0040

Page 165: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

([DPSOH��2QH�7LPH�&RPSOHWH�,QFOXVLRQ

-XQH����� ���

([DPSOH��2QH�7LPH�&RPSOHWH�,QFOXVLRQFirst calling up of the task list for order 90001 with the first operation selection:

6HOHFWDEOH�WDVN�OLVW�RSHUDWLRQV )LUVW�RSHUDWLRQVHOHFWLRQ

7DVN�OLVW�RSHUDWLRQV�LQ�WKHRUGHU

����Renew spark plugs

; ����Renew spark plugs

����Oil change

����Renew oil filter

; ����Renew oil filter

����Renew air filter

Second calling up of the task list for order 90001 with second operation selection:

6HOHFWDEOH�WDVN�OLVW�RSHUDWLRQV 6HFRQG�RSHUDWLRQVHOHFWLRQ

7DVN�OLVW�RSHUDWLRQV�LQ�WKHRUGHU

����Oil change

; ����Renew spark plugs

����Renew air filter

����Renew oil filter

����Oil change

Page 166: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

([DPSOH��2SHUDWLRQ�6RUWLQJ

��� -XQH�����

([DPSOH��2SHUDWLRQ�6RUWLQJFirst calling up of the task list for order 900012 with first operation selection:

6HOHFWDEOH�WDVN�OLVW�RSHUDWLRQV 6HOHFWLRQ 7DVN�OLVW�RSHUDWLRQV�LQ�WKH�RUGHU

����Renew spark plugs

; ����Renew spark plugs

����Oil change

����Renew oil filter

; ����Renew oil filter

����Renew air filter

����Check brakes

; ����Check brakes

����Check headlamp alignment

Second calling up of the task list for order 900012 with second operation selection:

6HOHFWDEOH�WDVN�OLVW�RSHUDWLRQV 6HOHFWLRQ 7DVN�OLVW�RSHUDWLRQV�LQ�WKH�RUGHU

����Renew spark plugs

����Oil change

; ����Oil change

����Renew oil filter

����Renew air filter

����Check brakes

����Check headlamp alignment

Page 167: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

([DPSOH��&KDQJH�RI�:RUN�&HQWHU

-XQH����� ���

([DPSOH��&KDQJH�RI�:RUN�&HQWHUIn a company, maintenance task lists were created whose operations contain dummy workcenters.

If one of these task lists is chosen for a maintenance order, the system displays the dialog boxfor the work center selection. The maintenance planner overwites the dummy work centers withthe work centers which should execute the work. Then the planner selects the operations to beexecuted and incorporates this special version of the task list into the maintenance order.

Page 168: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HWWLQJ�6HOHFWLRQ�)XQFWLRQV

��� -XQH�����

6HWWLQJ�6HOHFWLRQ�)XQFWLRQV1. Choose the maintenance order in the create or change mode.

2. Choose ([WUDV�→�6HWWLQJV�→�'HIDXOW�YDOXHV.

You see a dialog box.

3. Select the tab page &RQWURO.

4. In the section 7DVN�OLVW�WUDQVIHU, select the required selection functions.

You set the valid steps for automatic numbering of operations individually foreach order. To do this, in the required order, choose +HDGHU →5HVS�GDWHQ�3DUDPHWHU. You find the field 2SUWQ6WHS in the section 3DUDPHWHUV.

5. Save the settings.

These now apply for all the task lists which you include in orders in the future.

6HH�DOVR�

Selecting and Including an Object-Specific Task List [Page 170]

Selecting and Including a General Maintenance Task List [Page 171]

Page 169: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

,QFOXGLQJ�D�7DVN�/LVW�'LUHFWO\

-XQH����� ���

,QFOXGLQJ�D�7DVN�/LVW�'LUHFWO\

3UHUHTXLVLWHVIf you want to include a task list directly, you must know the task list group and the group counter.

3URFHGXUH1. Choose the required maintenance order in the create or change mode.

2. In the header data screen or the operation overview of the order, choose ([WUDV →7DVN�OLVW�VHOHFWLRQ�→�'LUHFW�LQSXW.

You see a dialog box in which you can enter the task list directly.

3. Choose whether you want to inlcude an equipment task list, a functional location tasklist or a general maintenance task list.

4. Make all the necessary entries and then choose &RQWLQXH.

The system displays the required task list in the order.

• If selection functions [Page 159] have been set in your system, or it is aconfigurable general maintenance task list, additional work steps may benecessary before the system can include the required task list.

• If the selected task list involves a configurable general maintenance task list,you must enter the valuations for the characteristics which the systemdisplays for this task list dependent upon the configuration profile.

If the reference object belongs to the same class as the the configurablegeneral maintenance task list, and characteristic valuations have beenentered for the object, then the system also proposes these characteristicvaluations here.

For more information on configurable maintenance task lists, see PM -Maintenance Task Lists [Ext.].

Page 170: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HOHFWLQJ�DQG�,QFOXGLQJ�DQ�2EMHFW�6SHFLILF�7DVN�/LVW

��� -XQH�����

6HOHFWLQJ�DQG�,QFOXGLQJ�DQ�2EMHFW�6SHFLILF�7DVN�/LVW1. Choose the required maintenance in the create or change mode.

2. In the order header data screen or operation overview, choose ([WUDV → 7DVN�OLVWVHOHFWLRQ → 2EMHFW�UHODWHG.

If you have already entered individual operation data for the maintenance order, or ifyou have included operations from another task list, the system displays a dialog box.

3. Decide whether you want to delete the previously defined operations or not.

You see a list of all the task lists created in the system for the reference object of themaintenance order concerned.

4. Select the required task list.

If selection functions [Page 159] have been set in your system, or you haveselected them manually, additional work steps such as, for example, selectingwork centers or operations, or entering execution factors [Page 65] may benecessary.

The system copies the selected task list into the maintenance order, and you return tothe initial screen of the maintenance order.

5. Save the maintenance order or adapt the assigned task list to the individualrequirements of the maintenance order as described in Adapting a Task List [Page173].

Page 171: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HOHFWLQJ�DQG�,QFOXGLQJ�D�*HQHUDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVN�/LVW

-XQH����� ���

6HOHFWLQJ�DQG�,QFOXGLQJ�D�*HQHUDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVN/LVW

1. Choose the required maintenance in the create or change mode.

2. In the order header data screen or the operation overview, select one of the followingoptions:

D�� If you have specified an DVVHPEO\ for the maintenance order and want to selectoperations from the general task lists allocated to that assembly, choose ([WUDV→ 7DVN�OLVW → &UHDWH�I�DVVHPEO\.

E�� If the reference object for the maintenance order is included in an REMHFWVWUXFWXUH (for example, a functional location structure or an equipment hierarchy)and you want to select operations from the general task lists allocated to thisstructure, choose ([WUDV → 7DVN�OLVW�VHOHFWLRQ → &UHDWH�I�REM�VWU�

F�� If you want to select from DOO the general task lists currently defined in the system,choose ([WUDV → 7DVN�OLVW�VHOHFWLRQ → 6HO��*HQ7DVN/LVW.

If there is already individual operation data defined for the maintenance order, or ifanother task list has already been included, the system displays a dialog box.

3. Decide whether the operations entered previously are to be deleted or not.

In case D� you then see a list of all general task lists for the assembly.

In case E� you then see a list of all general task lists for the object structure.

In case F� you will see a selection screen to be completed. Start the selection using3URJUDP → ([HFXWH. You will then see a list of all general task lists meeting yourselection criteria.

4. Select the required general task list.

The system displays a dialog box with all the operations contained in the selectedgeneral task list.

• If selection functions [Page 159] have been set in your system, or youhave selected them manually, additional work steps such as, forexample, selecting work centers or operations, or entering executionfactors [Page 65] may be necessary.

• If the selected task list involves a configurable general maintenance tasklist, you must enter the valuations for the characteristics which the systemdisplays for this task list dependent upon the configuration profile.

If the reference object belongs to the same class as the the configurablegeneral maintenance task list, and characteristic valuations have beenentered for the object, then the system also proposes these characteristicvaluations here.

For more information on configurable maintenance task lists, see PM -Maintenance Task Lists [Ext.].

Page 172: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HOHFWLQJ�DQG�,QFOXGLQJ�D�*HQHUDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVN�/LVW

��� -XQH�����

The system copies the selected task list into the maintenance order, and you return tothe initial screen of the maintenance order.

5. Save the maintenance order or adapt the assigned task list to the individualrequirements of the maintenance order as described in Adapting a Task List [Page173].

Page 173: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$GDSWLQJ�D�7DVN�/LVW

-XQH����� ���

$GDSWLQJ�D�7DVN�/LVWOnce you have assigned a task list to the maintenance order, you can adapt it to meet theindividual requirements of the order.

3URFHGXUH1. Select the operation overview of the maintenance order.

You see the individual operations and sub-operations of the included task list.

2. Change and make additions to the task list in this screen as required. You will findmore information on the different planning options in Contents: Planning in the PMOrder [Page 48].

3. If you want to change the execution factor for a particular operation, proceed asdescribed in Specifying the Execution Factor [Page 65].

4. Save the maintenance order.

When the system includes a task list in the maintenance order, it alsoautomatically carries out scheduling, so that the operation dates are immediatelyavailable and can be adapted as required.

Page 174: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'LVSOD\LQJ�,QFOXGHG�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVN�/LVWV

��� -XQH�����

'LVSOD\LQJ�,QFOXGHG�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVN�/LVWV

3UHUHTXLVLWHVIf you have included one or more maintenance task lists in a maintenance order, you can displaywhich task lists are involved.

3URFHGXUH1. Choose the required maintenance order in create or change mode.

2. In the header data screen or operation overview of the order, choose ([WUDV�→�7DVNOLVW�VHOHFWLRQ�→�'LVSOD\�WDVN�OLVWV.

The system displays a dialog box in which you see an overview of all themaintenance task lists included in the maintenance order.

Page 175: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�%LOOV�RI�0DWHULDO���2YHUYLHZ

-XQH����� ���

:RUN�6FKHGXOLQJ�ZLWK�%LOOV�RI�0DWHULDO���2YHUYLHZThis section describes how to use maintenance BOMs for planning maintenance tasks.

This section does QRW explain how to create bills of material. For information onthis topic, refer to the SAP documents PM - Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance[Ext.] and�PP - Bills of Material Guide [Ext.]�

Maintenance bills of material are used to describe the way in which a piece of equipment or afunctional location is structured and to allocate the spares to a piece of equipment or anassembly for maintenance purposes. They are either created individually for each piece ofequipment or functional location, or they may apply to a whole group of technical objects.

Maintenance bills of material consist of items which are distinguished according to itemcategories. In the standard system, you can allocate four different item categories to amaintenance order operation from the maintenance bill of material of the reference object:

• Stock item

• Non-stock item

• Variable-sized item

• Text item

Before allocating BOM components, you should read about the effects of allocating the differentcomponents. You will find this information in the topic Effects of Assigning BOM Components[Page 176].

Page 176: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�%20�&RPSRQHQWV

��� -XQH�����

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�%20�&RPSRQHQWVWhen you plan a maintenance order, you can assign materials from the maintenance BOM of thereference object to the individual operations. The following item categories are valid in this case:

• Stock item

• Variable-sized item

• Non-stock item

• Text item

The assignment of the individual BOM items has different effects in each case:

Effects of Assigning Stock Items [Page 177]

Effects of Assigning Variable-Sized Items [Page 178]

Effects of Assigning Non-Stock Items [Page 179]

Effects of Assigning Text Items [Page 181]

Page 177: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�6WRFN�,WHPV

-XQH����� ���

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�6WRFN�,WHPVIf you assign stock items to an operation, this has the following effects:

• The system automatically reserves the parts for the order at the latest when the orderis released (5HVHUYDWLRQ�3XUF�UHT indicator in the order header).

• If you print the shop papers after the order has been released, the parts can be foundin the pick list.

• Material issue slips for the parts, which authorize the craftsmen to remove the partsfrom the warehouse, are also printed with the shop papers.

For information on how to allocate BOM items, see Using Bills of Material in Order Planning[Page 182].

Page 178: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�9DULDEOH�6L]HG�,WHPV

��� -XQH�����

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�9DULDEOH�6L]HG�,WHPVIf you assign variable-sized items to an operation, this has the same effect as assigning stockitems, since you also assign materials held in stock in variable-sized items.

You can also specify the required dimensions.

For information on how to assign BOM items, see Using Bills of Material in Order Planning [Page182].

Page 179: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�1RQ�6WRFN�,WHPV

-XQH����� ���

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�1RQ�6WRFN�,WHPVIf you assign a non-stock item from the maintenance bill of material to an operation, the systemautomatically creates a purchase requisition for the purchasing department directly from theorder at the latest when the order is released (5HVHUYDWLRQ�3XUF�UHT indicator in the orderheader). This triggers external procurement processing, which is described in Contents: ExternalAssignment of Maintenance Tasks [Page 237].

Based on this purchase requisition, a purchase order is sent to a vendor. Upon delivery, thegoods receipt is posted directly to the maintenance order for which the material was requested,meaning that the maintenance order is debited immediately with the costs incurred upon goodsreceipt. When the invoice is received, any changes to costs incurred are settled to the order.

Graphic: External Procurement Processing [Page 180]

You will find out how to assign BOM items in Using Bills of Material in Order Planning [Page 182].

Page 180: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�1RQ�6WRFN�,WHPV

��� -XQH�����

*UDSKLF��([WHUQDO�3URFXUHPHQW�3URFHVVLQJ

30�2UGHU

$OORFDWLRQ�RIQRQ�VWRFNPDWHULDO

&RVWV�RIQRQ�VWRFNPDWHULDO

3XUFKDVLQJ

3XUFKDVH

UHTXLVLWLRQ

3XUFKDVH

*RRGV�UHFHLSW

,QYRLFHYHULILFDWLRQ

,QYRLFH

UHFHLSW

3�2UGHU�YDOXH

'LIIHUHQFH�EHWZHHQ�RUGHU�YDOXH�DQG�LQYRLFH�YDOXH

RUGHU

Page 181: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�7H[W�,WHPV

-XQH����� ���

(IIHFWV�RI�$VVLJQLQJ�7H[W�,WHPVIf you assign a text item from the maintenance bill of material to an operation, you make theinformation contained in the text item available to the employees carrying out the operation.

The short text for the text item appears on the material issue slip in the same way as all the othermaterial items.

When you print out the shop papers, the system also prints out the short text for the text item inthe same way as for all other material items. The long text appears on the job ticket.

Page 182: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

8VLQJ�%LOOV�RI�0DWHULDO�LQ�2UGHU�3ODQQLQJ

��� -XQH�����

8VLQJ�%LOOV�RI�0DWHULDO�LQ�2UGHU�3ODQQLQJA maintenance bill of material contains all the materials relevant to the maintenance of atechnical object. It therefore helps you considerably when planning the assignment of materialsin the maintenance order.

For information on how to assign BOM items to a maintenance order, see Assigning Bill ofMaterial Components [Page 183].

For information on how to display the BOM components assigned to an order, see DisplayingAssigned BOM Components [Page 184] or Displaying Assigned Materials [Page 88].

Page 183: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$VVLJQLQJ�%LOO�RI�0DWHULDO�&RPSRQHQWV

-XQH����� ���

$VVLJQLQJ�%LOO�RI�0DWHULDO�&RPSRQHQWVTo assign a material item to an operation from the maintenance BOM of the reference object,proceed as follows:

1. Select the maintenance order and then *RWR → 2SHUDWLRQ�RYHUYLHZ to access theoperation overview.

2. Select the operations to which you want to allocate material.

3. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → &RPSRQHQWV.

You reach the screen &RPSRQHQW�$OORFDWLRQ�2SHUDWLRQ for the first operation youselected.

4. Display the components from the reference object ‘s bill of material of those belingingto the assembly entered in the operation, either in the form of a graphic or as a listusing &RPSRQHQW → &RPSRQHQW�VHOHFWLRQ→ <required display form>.

5. Select the materials you want to assign to the operation.

6. Select the materials using the menu bar sequence (GLW�→�&KRRVH�

This takes you back to the component allocation screen for the operation you arecurrently editing. The system has entered the selected materials there. Check thedata and change it if necessary.

7. Choose &RPSRQHQW → $GG��RSHUDWLRQV → 1H[W�RSHUDWLRQ to get to the screen&RPSRQHQW�$OORFDWLRQ�2SHUDWLRQ for the next operation selected.

When you have assigned the required materials to all the operations, you return tothe operation overview screen.

8. Save the changes to the maintenance order.

For information on how to display the BOM components assigned to an order, see DisplayingAssigned BOM Components [Page 184] or Displaying Assigned Materials [Page 88].

Page 184: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'LVSOD\LQJ�$VVLJQHG�%20�&RPSRQHQWV

��� -XQH�����

'LVSOD\LQJ�$VVLJQHG�%20�&RPSRQHQWVYou can display all the materials assignment to an order in an overview list. To do this, choose*RWR → &RPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ in the header data screen�

Page 185: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

3URGXFWLRQ�5HVRXUFHV�DQG�7RROV��357�

-XQH����� ���

3URGXFWLRQ�5HVRXUFHV�DQG�7RROV��357�This section describes the use of production resources and tools in maintenance orders.

The employees responsible for a maintenance task require resources to help them carry outsome of the operations in the maintenance order. These resources are managed in the SAPSystem as production resources/tools (PRTs). PRTs belong to the group of operating andmaintenance resources and are used for assembly or shaping, or to check and restoredimensional accuracy, structure or functionality. Examples of PRTs are

• Tools

• Measurement instruments

• Drawings

• NC programs

Production resources/tools are represented in the SAP System in four different ways using:

1. The material master record

2. The document master record

3. A master record for other PRTs

4. An equipment master record

You will find out how to create productions resources/tools in the system in theSAP document PM - Maintenance Task Lists [Ext.].

You will find out how to create productions resources/tools as pieces ofequipment in the SAP document Structuring Technical Systems [Ext.].

You will find out how to plan production resources/tools in a maintenance order in UsingProduction Resources/Tools in a Maintenance Order [Page 186].

Page 186: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

8VLQJ�3URGXFWLRQ�5HVRXUFHV�7RROV�LQ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

��� -XQH�����

8VLQJ�3URGXFWLRQ�5HVRXUFHV�7RROV�LQ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH2UGHUIf you use PRTs in a maintenance order, you can plan their use in detail. The following functionsare available using the PRT management functionality in the R/3 System:

• Assigning PRTs to an Operation [Page 187]

• Deleting PRTs from an Operation [Page 190]

• Using Quantity Management for PRTs [Page 191]

• Scheduling PRTs [Page 192]

• Checking the Availability of PRTs [Page 193]

• Using Status Management With Production Resources/Tools [Page 197]

Page 187: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$VVLJQLQJ�357V�WR�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ

-XQH����� ���

$VVLJQLQJ�357V�WR�DQ�2SHUDWLRQYou can assign different PRTs to the same operation in a maintenance order, or assign the samePRT to several different operations.

Graphic: Assignment of PRTs to Order Operations [Page 189]

To assign a PRT to an operation, perfom the following eight steps:

1. Call up the Create or Change function for maintenance orders in the 0DLQWHQDQFH3URFHVVLQJ�screen.

You reach the initial screen for creating or changing a maintenance order.

2. Make all the necessary entries. Then proceed with A or B, depending on whether youare creating or changing the PM order:

a) If you are creating a QHZ maintenance order, press ENTER and make all therequired entries as described in Creating a PM Order [Page 29] and Contents:Planning in the PM Order [Page 48]. Then choose 2SHUDWLRQ�RYHUYLHZ.

b) If you are changing an H[LVWLQJ order, select the 2SHUDWLRQ�RYHUYLHZ directly.

3. Select the operation to which you want to allocate PRTs in the 2SHUDWLRQ�RYHUYLHZ.You cannot allocate PRTs to sub-operations.

4. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → 357.

The system processes the operations you selected in order:

,I��� 7KHQ���

PRTs have not yet beenallocated to the operation,

You see the dialog box 357�1HZ�/LQHV for the PRTcategory “Material”.

If you want to add PRTs of another category (forexample, "Equipment" or "Document"), press theappropriate push-button.

You then see the dialog box 357V�1HZ�/LQHV with thefields for the required PRT category.

PRTs have already beenallocated to the operation,

You see the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ. To allocatefurther PRTs select (GLW → 1HZ�OLQHV and then one ofthe following options:

- 0DWHULDO- 2WKHU- 'RFXPHQW��(TXLSPHQW

You then see the dialog box 357�1HZ�/LQHV with thefields for the required PRT category.

5. Make all the necessary and required entries in the dialog box 357�1HZ�/LQHV.

6. Select Copy to assign the PRT entered to the operation. The system enters the PRTin the 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ and displays the dialog box 357�1HZ�/LQHV again ready

Page 188: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$VVLJQLQJ�357V�WR�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

for input. You can now assign another type of PRT. To do this, select the requiredoption in the function key menu.

When you have entered the last PRT that you want to allocate in the dialog box,press &RQWLQXH to take you back to the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ, which nowcontains all the production resources/tools that you have assigned.

7. If you have selected further operations to which you wanted to assign PRTs, choose2SHUDWLRQ → 1H[W�RSHUDWLRQ.

8. When you have processed all the required operations, return to the 2SHUDWLRQ2YHUYLHZ and save the maintenance order.

Page 189: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$VVLJQLQJ�357V�WR�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ

-XQH����� ���

*UDSKLF��$VVLJQPHQW�RI�357V�WR�2UGHU�2SHUDWLRQV

30�2UGHU

���

2SHUDWLRQ�����

2SHUDWLRQ�����

2SHUDWLRQ�����

3URGXFWLRQ�UHV��WRRO��

3URGXFWLRQ�UHV��WRRO��

3URGXFWLRQ�UHV��WRRO��

Page 190: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'HOHWLQJ�357V�IURP�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

'HOHWLQJ�357V�IURP�DQ�2SHUDWLRQTo delete production resources/tools for an operation in the maintenance order, perform thefollowing seven steps:

1. Call up the maintenance order from the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen using 2UGHUV→ &KDQJH or with the list editing function.

2. Select the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ of the maintenance order.

3. Select the operations for which you want to delete PRTs.

4. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → 357�IRU�RSHUDWLRQ.

The system processes the operations you selected one after another.

You see the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ for the first operation selected.

5. Select the PRTs you want to delete and choose (GLW → 'HOHWH. The system nowperforms one of the following activities:

– If the maintenance order has QRW yet been�UHOHDVHG, the system deletes theselected PRTs from the list.

– If the maintenance order has DOUHDG\ been UHOHDVHG, the deleted PRT remains inthe list. However, it can no longer be processed.

Return to the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ and save the maintenance order when you haveprocessed all the operations selected.

6. Save the maintenance order.

Page 191: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

8VLQJ�4XDQWLW\�0DQDJHPHQW�IRU�357V

-XQH����� ���

8VLQJ�4XDQWLW\�0DQDJHPHQW�IRU�357VIf you are using PRTs for a maintenance order, there may be some cases where you have to:

• Define exactly how many PRTs of a particular category you require

You need two hammer drills to repair a building.

• Enter the usage value of the PRTs

The usage value helps you determine the degree of wear and tear of a PRT duringuse. Entering a usage value is important if, for example, the PRT will be worn out andwill need to be refurbished after having been used a particular number of times.

You need the two drills for a total of 200 holes.

To do this, you can use the quantity management function for PRTs. With this function, you canenter quantities and usage values for the planned PRTs, expressed as a formula if required.

To use the quantity management functions for PRTs, proceed as follows:

1. Select the required maintenance order, call up the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ and select theoperations you require.

2. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → 357.

You reach the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ for the first operation selected.

3. Select the required PRTs in the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ and call up the quantitymanagement function with 3URG5HV�7RROV�→�4XDQWLWLHV.

You see the screen 357�4XDQWLWLHV for the first PRT selected.

4. Make all the necessary entries and call up any further selected PRTs using3URG5HV�7RROV�→�&RQWLQXH�

5. Return to the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ where you can process PRTs or furtheroperations if required. Return to the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ.

6. Save the maintenance order.

Page 192: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6FKHGXOLQJ�357V

��� -XQH�����

6FKHGXOLQJ�357VIf you are using PRTs for a maintenance order, you often do not need them for the entire durationof the operation. For this reason you can schedule the individual PRTs individually within thedates defined for the operation.

To schedule PRTs, proceed as follows:

1. Select the required maintenance order, call up the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ and select theoperations you require.

2. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → 357.

You reach the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ for the first operation selected.

3. Select the required PRTs in the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ and go to scheduling3URG5HV�7RROV�→�'DWHV.

The system displays the field groups 6FKHGXOLQJ�GDWD and 'DWHV�IRU�357�XVDJH�forthe first PRT selected.

4. Make all the necessary entries in field group 6FKHGXOLQJ�GDWD and then press ENTER�

The system places the dates determined in the field group 'DWHV�IRU�357�XVDJH.

5. Check the dates and make any changes required to the date parameters.

6. Call up any further selected PRTs using 3URG5HV�7RROV�→�&RQWLQXH�

7. Return to the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ where you can process PRTs or furtheroperations, if required.

8. Save the maintenance order.

Page 193: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&KHFNLQJ�WKH�$YDLODELOLW\�RI�357V

-XQH����� ���

&KHFNLQJ�WKH�$YDLODELOLW\�RI�357VIf you manage the PRTs used in your company at a detailed level, you can determine whenassigning a PRT to an operation whether or not it is available for that operation at the timerequired.

The system checks:

• Whether, for production resources/tools with the category “Material”, the materialstatus allows the PRT to be planned.

• Whether, for production resources/tools with the category “Material”, the stocksituation allows the material to be planned.

• Whether for production resources/tools with the category "Equipment”

− The equipment status allows it to be planned in the maintenance

− The available resource pool is sufficient for planning

For production resources/tools, the resource pool means the difference betweenthe actual coutner reading and the next planned counter reading.

Checks for production resources/tools of the type “Equipment” can only beperformed, if your System Adminstrator has activated one of the following optionsin Customizing:

• Equipment status check

• Equipment status DQG resource pool check

To check the resource pool, the following prerequisites must be met inthe equipment master record:

� The piece of equipment must be allocated to a performance-based counter,from which readings are regularly taken.

� A performance-based preventive maintenance plan must have been createdfor the counter.

You have the following functions at your disposal.

• Checking PRT Availability in the Operation [Page 194]

• Checking PRT Availability for the Entire Maintenance Order [Page 195]

• Checking PRT Availability Upon Order Release [Page 196]

Page 194: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&KHFNLQJ�357�$YDLODELOLW\�LQ�WKH�2SHUDWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

&KHFNLQJ�357�$YDLODELOLW\�LQ�WKH�2SHUDWLRQTo check the availability of a PRT directly in the operation, proceed as follows:

1. Select the maintenance order required. Call up the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ and selectthe operations you require.

2. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → 357�

You see the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ for the first operation selected.

3. Select the PRT required in the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ and call up theavailability check with 3URG5HV�7RROV → )XQFWLRQV → 357�DYDLODELOLW\.

The system checks whether the selected PRTs are available at the time required andinforms you in an on-line message of the result of the check. If they are not available,you can find out why in the error log with *RWR → 3URWRFROV → 357�DYDLODELOLW\.

Page 195: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&KHFNLQJ�357�$YDLODELOLW\�IRU�WKH�(QWLUH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

-XQH����� ���

&KHFNLQJ�357�$YDLODELOLW\�IRU�WKH�(QWLUH�0DLQWHQDQFH2UGHUTo check in a single work step the availability of all the PRTs that were allocated to amaintenance order, proceed as follows:

1. Select the maintenance order required.

2. Select the function 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → $YDLODELOLW\ → 357�DYDLODELOLW\.

The system carries out an availability check for all the PRTs that were allocated to themaintenance order in its operations. It informs you of the result in an on-linemessage. If some of the PRTs are not available, you can display the error logcontaining detailed data on the result of the check with *RWR → 3URWRFROV → 357DYDLODELOLW\.

Page 196: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&KHFNLQJ�357�$YDLODELOLW\�8SRQ�2UGHU�5HOHDVH

��� -XQH�����

&KHFNLQJ�357�$YDLODELOLW\�8SRQ�2UGHU�5HOHDVHWhen you release a maintenance order, the system carries out an availability check for theplanned PRTs, based on your customizing settings. If the check reveals that some of theplanned PRTs are not available, your system settings determine whether or not you can stillrelease the order.

Page 197: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

8VLQJ�6WDWXV�0DQDJHPHQW�:LWK�3URGXFWLRQ�5HVRXUFHV�7RROV

-XQH����� ���

8VLQJ�6WDWXV�0DQDJHPHQW�:LWK�3URGXFWLRQ5HVRXUFHV�7RROVUsing the status management functions, you can find out which business transactions areallowed for a PRT, to determine, for example, whether you are allowed to carry out an availabilitycheck or not.

To call up the status management functions for production resources/tools, proceed as follows:

1. Select the maintenance order, call up the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ and select theoperations required.

2. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ → 2YHUYLHZV → 357.

You see the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ for the first operation selected.

3. Select the required PRT in the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ and all up statusmanagement with 3URG5HV�7RROV → 6WDWXV.

You see the screen &KDQJH�6WDWXV, continuing a list of the system statuses currentlyactive.

4. Display the allowed business transaction by choosing 'HWDLOV → 7UDQVDFWLRQVDOORZHG.

5. Return to the &KDQJH�6WDWXV screen and display the status for further selected PRTswith (GLW → 1H[W�REMHFW.

6. Return to the screen 357�/LVW�IRU�2SHUDWLRQ and display the status for PRTs in furtheroperations if required.

Page 198: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6KRS�3DSHUV

��� -XQH�����

6KRS�3DSHUV

'HILQLWLRQShop papers are documents which are required for the execution of a maintenance order.

• You can generally only print shop papers if the control key for the operationwill allow this. In other words, if the indicator 3ULQW is active for the control key.

• The following requirements must also be met for the order in the standardsystem:

� The system status 5(/($6(' is set

� The order is not completed

8VHThe following shop papers available in the standard system:

&RQWURO�7LFNHW

The operation control ticket gives the responsible maintenance planner a complete overview ofthe maintenance order. It also contains details of permits.

-RE�7LFNHW

The job ticket which accompanies the order provides the manual worker carrying out the taskwith a complete overview of the order.

If the Document Management System is set up in your system, you can also printgraphics on the job ticket (for example, construction drawings of the technicalsystem affected) in postscript format.

3LFN�/LVW

The pick list informs the warehouse clerk which materials have been dispatched for eachoperation in the order.

0DWHULDO�,VVXH�6OLS

Material issue slips authorize the manual worker to issue the materials required for the order fromthe warehouse. A separate material issue slip is printed for each material component.

7LPH�7LFNHW

The time ticket is a means of recording work times and assigning labor costs to work centers orcost objects.

Time tickets are only printed for operations where specified by the control key. The number oftime tickets specified for each manual worker involved in an order is printed out for eachoperation. The manual worker enters the time that he needed to carry out the operation.

7LPH�7LFNHW�IRU�6SOLW�5HFRUGV

Page 199: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6KRS�3DSHUV

-XQH����� ���

For this time ticket, the same conditions apply as for the normal time ticket. However, thespecified number is printed for each operation split. The manual worker enters on it the timewhich he required to execute the split.

&RPSOHWLRQ�&RQILUPDWLRQ�7LFNHW

The manual workers enter on the completion confirmation ticket the relevant completionconfirmation data for each operation, if they themselves do not have authorization to use thesystem. The entries on the tickets are then entered centrally into the system.

For each operation, completion confirmation tickets are issued in the planned quantity, if thecontrol key for the operation allows the printing of completion confirmations and one of the shoppapers is indicated as a completion confirmation ticket.

&RPSOHWLRQ�&RQILUPDWLRQ�7LFNHW�IRU�6SOLW�5HFRUGV

The same conditions apply for this completion confirmation ticket as for the normal completionconfirmation ticket. However, it is printed for each operation split in the number specified there.

For details of how to print shop papers, see Printing/Faxing Shop Papers [Page 200].

Page 200: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

3ULQWLQJ�)D[LQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV

��� -XQH�����

3ULQWLQJ�)D[LQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV

8VHYou use these functions if you want to print or fax the shop papers for the order.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV• You can genearally only print shop papers if the control key for the operation will

allow this. In other words, if the indicator 3ULQW is active for the control key.

• The following requirements must also be met for the order in the standard system:

− The system status 5(/($6(' is set if you want to print

− The order is not completed if you want to print

)HDWXUHV

3ULQWLQJ�)XQFWLRQV

The following functions are available for printing shop papers:

• Print function

Using this function you can print out shop papers on a printer.

• Fax function

Using this function you can create shop papers using a telefax machine.

7\SHV�RI�3ULQWRXW

• Printing Shop Papers According to System Settings [Page 202]

You use this procedure if you want to print out the shop papers for an order quicklyand without changing the system settings.

• Printing Shop Papers with Individual Settings [Page 203]

You use this procedure if you want to make additional entries for the shop paperprintout for a particular order.

• Arbeitspapiere beim In-Arbeit-Geben drucken [Page 154]

You use this procedure if you want to combine the shop paper printout with theputting in process of an order.

• Printing Shop Papers for Individual Operations [Page 205]

You use this procedure if you want to print out shop papers for certain operations ofan order. This is useful, for example:

− If you put the operations of an order at lengthy intervals

− If certain maintenance groups only want to print out the shop papers for particularoperations which concern them

− If the shop papers of an operation have been lost

• Reprinting Shop Papers [Page 206]

Page 201: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

3ULQWLQJ�)D[LQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV

-XQH����� ���

You use this procedure if you want to reprint out shop papers for an order, forexample, because the original printouts are dirty or have been lost.

• Delta Printing [Page 207]

You use this procedure if you want to print out the shop papers for all the orderoperations not yet printed.

$GGLWLRQDO�)XQFWLRQV

• Storing Shop Papers in ArchiveLink [Page 209]

You use this procedure if you want to save the shop papers for an order inArchiveLink, the optical storage medium of the R/3 System.

• Call Up Print Preview [Page 210]

You use this procedure if you want to see the print preview before you print out theshop papers.

• Druckprotokoll anzeigen [Page 211]

You use this procedure if you want to look at the print log for an order. The print log iscreated automatically by the system if you have printed the shop papers. You can usethis to determine:

− Which papers have already been printed for an order

− Who printed them out

− When they were printed

Page 202: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�6\VWHP�6HWWLQJV

��� -XQH�����

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�6\VWHP�6HWWLQJV

3URFHGXUH1. Select the required order from the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen using 2UGHUV →

&KDQJH and then enter the order number.

You reach the header data screen of the order.

2. Now choose the icon 3ULQW in the top line of icons.

5HVXOWThe system prints the shop papers according to the values set in the system and saves theorder.

If no shop papers have been printed, check the printing equipment to seewhether:

• Your print order is in the spool

• The settings for the control key for printing are allowed

• The print diversion is active

Page 203: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�ZLWK�,QGLYLGXDO�6HWWLQJV

-XQH����� ���

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�ZLWK�,QGLYLGXDO�6HWWLQJV

3URFHGXUH1. Choose the required order in change mode using /RJLVWLFV�→ 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH�→

0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ�→ 2UGHUV�→ &KDQJH�and then enter the order number.

You reach the header data screen of the order.

2. Choose 2UGHU → 3ULQW → 2UGHU.

The system displays the dialog box &KRRVH�6KRS�3DSHUV, containing the shop papersthat you can print for this order type and other printing data.

3. Select the papers you want to produce.

Depending on your system settings, individual papers may be automatically selected.Check all the specifications in the dialog box and overwrite them if necessary.

Note that you can archive shop papers in ArchiveLink (see Storing Shop Papers inArchiveLink [Page 209]).

4. Decide whether you want to fax or print the shop papers.

Make all the necessary entries (see Making Fax and/or Print Entries [Page 204]).

5. Save the maintenance order.

The shop papers for the maintenance order are printed at the specified printer orfaxed to the number you specified. The maintenance order now has the status"printed".

6. Choose 3ULQW�)D[.

5HVXOW• The system saves the order.

• The shop papers for the order are printed at the specified printed or faxed to thenumber entered.

• The order has the status 35,17('.

If no shop papers have been printed, check the printing equipment to seewhether:

• Your print order is in the spool

• The settings for the control key for printing are allowed

• The print diversion is active

Page 204: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

0DNLQJ�)D[�DQG�RU�3ULQW�(QWULHV

��� -XQH�����

0DNLQJ�)D[�DQG�RU�3ULQW�(QWULHV

3UHUHTXLVLWHVYou want to print and/or fax the shop papers of an order and hace called up the dialog box&KRRVH�6KRS�3DSHUV.

3ULQW�$OO�6HOHFWHG�3DSHUVChoose 3ULQW�)D[.

The system saves the order.

The shop papers for the order are printed at the specified printer or faxed to the number entered.The order has the status 35,17('.

)D[�$OO�6HOHFWHG�3DSHUV�WR�WKH�6DPH�1XPEHU

1. Choose 0XOWLSOH�ID[�

The system displays a dialog box.

2. Enter the target country and the fax number.

3. Choose &RQWLQXH.

The system saves the order.

The shop papers for the order are faxed to the to the number entered. The order hasthe status 35,17('.

3ULQW�6RPH�3DSHUV�DQG�)D[�2WKHUV

1. In the dialog box &KRRVH�6KRS�3DSHUV, make the fax entries for the papers you wantto fax and the print entries for the papers you want to print.

2. Choose 3ULQW�)D[.

The system saves the order.

The shop papers for the order are printed at the specified printed or faxed to thenumber entered. The order has the status 35,17('.

Page 205: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�IRU�,QGLYLGXDO�2SHUDWLRQV

-XQH����� ���

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�IRU�,QGLYLGXDO�2SHUDWLRQV

3URFHGXUH1. Select the maintenance order in change mode with /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH →

0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → &KDQJH.

2. Choose 2UGHU → 3ULQW�→�,QGLY2SHUDWLRQ3ULQW�VHOHFWLRQ from the header data screenor the operation overview.

The system displays a dialog box with a list of all the operations for the maintenanceorder.

3. Select the operations for which you want to print shop papers.

4. Choose &RQWLQXH.

The system displays an on-line message, informing you that the operations wereselected for printing individually and displays the dialog box 3ULQW�6KRS�3DSHUV inwhich you can see the shop papers which can be printed as well as the printspecifications.

5. Select the papers you want to print.

Note that you can archive shop papers in ArchiveLink (see Storing Shop Papers inArchiveLink [Page 209]).

6. Check all the data entered by the system based on your system settings in&XVWRPL]LQJ, and overwrite them if necessary.

7. Decide whether you want to print or fax the shop papers. See Making Fax and/orPrint Entries [Page 204].

8. Choose 3ULQW/)D[.

5HVXOW• The system saves the order.

• The shop papers for the order are printed at the specified printed or faxed to thenumber entered. The order has the status 35,17('.

If no shop papers have been printed, check the printing equipment to seewhether:

• Your print order is in the spool

• The settings for the control key for printing are allowed

• The print diversion is active

Page 206: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5HSULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV

��� -XQH�����

5HSULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUVTo reprint shop papers, you proceed in exactly the same way as for printing them the first time.

• If you print out several copies for an order when you first print it, all thesecopies are classed as “original”.

• If you reprint orders, these are automatically classed by the system as “copy”and given the sequential number. The original copy is number “1”.

6HH�

• Printing Shop Papers with Individual Settings [Page 203]

• Call Up Print Preview [Page 210]

• Printing Shop Papers for Individual Operations [Page 205]

Page 207: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'HOWD�3ULQWLQJ

-XQH����� ���

'HOWD�3ULQWLQJ

3UHUHTXLVLWHVDelta printing is only intended for operations which do not yet have the status 35,17('.

You can only execute delta printing if provision has been made for it in your system. For this, thesystem administration must make the necessary setting in Customizing.

2SHUDWLRQ�VWDWXV

An operation receives the status 35,17(' from the system as soon as a shoppaper, for which the indicator 2SHUDWLRQ�VWDWXV was set in Customizing, is printedfor it.

If the status indicator 2SHUDWLRQ�VWDWXV has not been set in Customizing for any ofthe shop papers, the system can never assign the status 35,17(' to theoperations. If you then execute a delta print, the system reprints the shop papersfor DOO the operations.

2UGHU�VWDWXV

An order has the status 3DUWO\�SULQWHG if its operations already had the status35,17(' when a new operation was added.

3URFHGXUH1. Proceed in exactly the same way as for printing for the first time.

See:

– Printing Shop Papers with Individual Settings [Page 203]

– Printing Shop Papers for Individual Operations [Page 205]

2. In the dialog box &KRRVH�6KRS�3DSHUV, you must also select the field 'HOWD for therequired papers.

These papers are printed out for those order operations which do not yet have thestatus 35,17('.

For operations which have the status 35,17(', these papers are QRW printed,even if they have not been printed for the print operation for which the status forthese operations was set.

You have the option of overriding the setting for the delta print at runtime, in order to perform acomplete print.

5HVXOWIf you execute a delta print:

• Only new, this means operations not yet printed, appear on the job ticket andoperation control ticket

Page 208: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'HOWD�3ULQWLQJ

��� -XQH�����

• Time tickets are only printed if they have not yet been printed

• Components are only printed if they have not previously been printed on a componentticket (for example, the material issue slip)

• The printed papers are indicated as a delta print

• If you have changed the specifications in the fields 4XDQWLW\ or :RUN for theprinted operations, the system does QRW reset the status 35,17('.

• If no shop papers have been printed, check the printing equipment to seewhether:

� Your print order is in the spool

� The settings for the control key for printing are allowed

� The print diversion is active

Page 209: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6WRULQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�LQ�$UFKLYH/LQN

-XQH����� ���

6WRULQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�LQ�$UFKLYH/LQN

$UFKLYLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV1. Select the shop papers that you want to archive in the dialog box &KRRVH�6KRS

3DSHUV�

For details of how to access the dialog box, see Printing Shop Papers with IndividualSettings [Page 203].

2. Use the icon &KRRVH�WR�Fall up the detail screen for each of these shop papers andenter the desired indicator in the field $UFKLYLQJ�PRGH�

3. Choose &RQWLQXH.

You reach the dialog box &KRRVH�6KRS�3DSHUV.

4. Choose 3ULQW�)D[.

The system saves the order.

The shop papers for the order are now archived and/or printed according to yourspecifications in the ArchiveLink.

If no shop papers have been printed, check the printing equipment to seewhether:

• Your print order is in the spool

• The settings for the control key for printing are allowed

• The print diversion is active

$UFKLYLHUWH�$UEHLWVSDSLHUH�DQ]HLJHQTo display an object that is stored in the ArchiveLink with reference to a maintenance order,select (QYLURQPHQW → 'LVSOD\��RULJ�GRFV��from the maintenance order.

6HH�DOVR�

SAP document SAP - ArchiveLink - Application Scenarios [Ext.].

Page 210: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&DOO�8S�3ULQW�3UHYLHZ

��� -XQH�����

&DOO�8S�3ULQW�3UHYLHZ

3URFHGXUH1. Choose the required order in change mode with /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH →

0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → &KDQJH.

2. Proceed now to the neader data screen or the operation overview using either A or B:

a) 2UGHU → 3ULQW → 2UGHU.

The system displays the dialog box &KRRVH�6KRS�3DSHUV, in which you can seethe shop papers which can be printed as well as print specifications.

b) 2UGHU → 3ULQW → &KRRVH�RSHUDWLRQ.

The system displays a dialog box with a list of all the operation orders.

Select the operations for which you want to print shop papers.

Choose &RQWLQXH.

The system informs you that the operations have been marked for individualprinting and displays the dialog box &KRRVH�VKRS�SDSHUV, in which you can seethe shop papers which can be printed as well as the print specifications.

3. Select the papers you want to print.

Individual papers may already be selected owing to Customizing settings made by thesystem administration. Check all entries in the dialog box and change them, ifnecessary, by overwriting them.

4. Choose 3ULQW�SUHYLHZ.

You now see a print preview of those papers which you have selected for printing.

5. To return to the dialog box &KRRVH�6KRS�3DSHUV, choose *RWR�→�%DFN.

Page 211: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&DOOLQJ�8S�WKH�3ULQW�/RJ

-XQH����� ���

&DOOLQJ�8S�WKH�3ULQW�/RJ

3URFHGXUH1. Choose the header data screen of the required order with /RJLVWLFV�→�3ODQW

0DLQWHQDQFH�→�0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ�→�2UGHUV�→��UHTXLUHG�HGLWLQJ�PRGH!.

2. Choose *RWR → /RJV → 3ULQW.

You see the print log.

Page 212: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'RZQORDGLQJ�2UGHUV

��� -XQH�����

'RZQORDGLQJ�2UGHUVService technicians working on-site with a PC have an alternative to printing out shop papers: ifthey want to display and edit orders requiring on-site processing on the PC, they can downloadthe orders from the SAP System into an Access data base.

For this to be possible, your system administration needs to make the appropriate settings inCustomizing.

The SAP System merely supplies the maintenance order for downloading. Thecustomer is responsible for providing the PC application used to process the dataon-site.

'RZQORDG�IRU�D�/LVW�RI�2UGHUV

To download a list of maintenance orders from the system, proceed as follows:

1. Create a list of all the maintenance orders in the system that you want to download.Proceed as described in Selection of Maintenance Orders and Operations Using Lists[Page 250].

2. Choose /LVW → $FFHVV.

The system loads the list into the Access data base on the PC. How it is processeddepends on the tools used.

'RZQORDG�IRU�DQ�,QGLYLGXDO�2UGHU

To download an individual maintenance order from the system, proceed as follows:

1. Call up the maintenance order that you want to download from the system.

2. Choose 2UGHU → 3ULQW → 'RZQORDG.

3. Save the maintenance order.

The system loads the maintenance order into the Access data base on the PC. How itis processed depends on the tools used.

Page 213: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

,VVXLQJ�DQG�3URFXULQJ�0DWHULDO

-XQH����� ���

,VVXLQJ�DQG�3URFXULQJ�0DWHULDO

8VHThese functions are used if the order is released for execution and craftsmen processingmaintenance tasks withdraw the materials they require from stock.

)HDWXUHVThere are two different forms of material issue:

• Issuing Planned Stock Material [Page 214]

• Issuing Unplanned Stock Material [Page 215]

You can also use external procurement to obtain material not held in stock (See ExternalProcurement of Non-Stock Material [Page 216]).

You can display material movements occuring for a maintenance order. (See Displaying GoodsMovement for Maintenance Orders [Page 219].

Page 214: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

,VVXLQJ�3ODQQHG�6WRFN�0DWHULDO

��� -XQH�����

,VVXLQJ�3ODQQHG�6WRFN�0DWHULDO

3UHUHTXLVLWHVBefore you can issue stock material for an order, the order must be released.

The planned issue of stock material for an order is usually entered in the systemby employees under inventory management.

3URFHGXUH1. From the initial SAP screen, choose /RJLVWLFV → 0DWHULDOV�PDQDJHPHQW → ,QYHQWRU\

PDQDJHPHQW → *RRGV�PRYHPHQW → *RRGV�LVVXH.

You reach the screen (QWHU�*RRGV�,VVXH��,QLWLDO�6FUHHQ.

2. Choose *RRGV�LVVXH → &UHDWH�Z��UHIHUHQFH → 7R�RUGHU�

The system displays the dialog box 5HIHUHQFH��2UGHU.

3. Enter the number of the maintenance order for which stock material is to be issued inthe dialog box and press�&RQWLQXH.

You see the screen (QWHU�*RRGV�,VVXH��6HOHFWLRQ�6FUHHQ, in which you see a list of allthe materials dispatched for the specified maintenance order.

4. Select the materials you are withdrawing from stock.

5. Save the withdrawal with *RRGV�LVVXH → 3RVW.

Page 215: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

,VVXLQJ�8QSODQQHG�6WRFN�0DWHULDO

-XQH����� ���

,VVXLQJ�8QSODQQHG�6WRFN�0DWHULDO

3UHUHTXLVLWHVBefore you can issue stock material for an order, the order must be released.

The unplanned issue of stock material for an order is usually entered in thesystem by employees under inventory management.

3URFHGXUH1. From the initial SAP screen, choose /RJLVWLFV → 0DWHULDOV�PDQDJHPHQW → ,QYHQWRU\

PDQDJHPHQW → *RRGV�PRYHPHQW → *RRGV�LVVXH.

You reach the screen (QWHU�*RRGV�,VVXH��,QLWLDO�6FUHHQ.

2. Choose 0RYHPHQW�W\SH → &RQVXPSWLRQ → 7R�RUGHU → )URP�ZDUHKRXVH.

The system enters the relevant data (movement type, plant, storage location) in thecorresponding fields. Check these entries, change them if necessary and confirmthem by pressing (17(5.

You see the screen (QWHU�*RRGV�,VVXH��1HZ�,WHPV.

3. Enter the number of the maintenance order for which you want to withdraw unplannedmaterial, together with the required materials, quantities, and so on.

4. Press ENTER to access the screen (QWHU�*RRGV�,VVXH��&ROOHFWLYH�3URFHVVLQJ, whichcontains a list of all the materials you want to withdraw.

5. Save the material withdrawal with *RRGV�LVVXH → 3RVW.

Page 216: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

([WHUQDO�3URFXUHPHQW�RI�1RQ�6WRFN�0DWHULDO

��� -XQH�����

([WHUQDO�3URFXUHPHQW�RI�1RQ�6WRFN�0DWHULDOIf you plan non-stock material for a maintenance order, the system creates a purchase requisitionfor the purchase directly from the order. This triggers external procurement processing.

You can define that the net price entered in the order and copied into thepurchase requisition must be unchanged. To do this, you must set the indicator&RS\�QHW�SULFH�IURP�SXUFK��UHT��LQWR�SXUFK��RUGHU in your system for the requiredorder type in the Customizing of Plant Maintenance.

On the basis of the purchase requisition, a purchase order is sent to a vendor. Upon delivery, thegoods receipt is posted directly to the maintenance order for which the material was requested,that is, the order is immediately debited with the corresponding costs upon goods receipt. Uponinvoice receipt, any changes to the costs incurred are saved to the order.

See also:

• Creating Purchase Requisitions [Page 217]

• Changing Order Data Relevant to Purchase Orders [Page 218]

Page 217: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWLQJ�3XUFKDVH�5HTXLVLWLRQV

-XQH����� ���

&UHDWLQJ�3XUFKDVH�5HTXLVLWLRQV

8VHTo procure non-stock material and external labor, purchase requisitions must be created in thesystem. The system offers you the following possibilities:

• You can automatically create purschase requisitions.

• You can specify when purchase requisitions are to be created individually for eachorder.

)HDWXUHV

&UHDWLQJ�3XUFKDVH�5HTXLVLWLRQV�$XWRPDWLFDOO\

Using the Customizing function, you can set up the system in such a way that a purchaserequisition is created as soon as a non-stock material or external labor is planned in amaintenance order.

You can define this function for each individual order type.

Once you have activated the function for an order type, the system sets the indicator “Purchaserequisition created” in the header screen for each maintenance order of this type. This indicatorapplies to the entire maintenance order and cannot be reversed.

'HILQLQJ�ZKHQ�3XUFKDVH�5HTXLVLWLRQ�DUH�&UHDWHG�,QGLYLGXDOO\

For those order types for which you do QRW want a purchase requisition to be automaticallycreated when planning the maintenance order, you must use the Customizing function to set upthe system in such a way that the indicator “Purchase requisition created” is not automaticallyset. You can then decide individually when you want the purchase requisition to be created.

Once you have set the indicator, you cannot reverse it as the purchase requisition has alreadybeen created for the maintenance order. The purchase requisition covers all non-stock materialsand external labor that you plan at a later date.

The indicator “Purchase requisition created” is set when the maintenance order isreleased.

Page 218: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&KDQJLQJ�2UGHU�'DWD�5HOHYDQW�WR�3XUFKDVH�2UGHUV

��� -XQH�����

&KDQJLQJ�2UGHU�'DWD�5HOHYDQW�WR�3XUFKDVH�2UGHUVSometimes you cannot avoid changing order data which refers to a purchase order that hasalready been created. This data could be, for example, deadlines, quantities or quantity units.Sometimes entire external operations or components must be deleted.

This is the reason why the maintenance order has been linked to Workflow. You can define thisusing the Customizing function individually for each order type and user in your system. WithWorkflow all relevant changes to order data are automatically sent to the appropriate purchasinggroup. This group can then display both the old and the new version of the order data and takethe appropriate measures.

You can use customer exit COZF0001 to change purchase requisitions whichresult from H[WHUQDO�RSHUDWLRQV.

You can use customer exit COZF0002 to change purchase requisitions whichresult from H[WHUQDO�FRPSRQHQWV.

Before you use enhancements, read the appropriate documentation.To do this, from the initial SAP screen, choose 7RROV�→�$%$3�:RUNEHQFK�→8WLOLWLHV�→�(QKDQFHPHQWV�→�'HILQLWLRQ.Enter the number of the enhancement.Select 'RFXPHQWDWLRQ and choose 'LVSOD\.

Page 219: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'LVSOD\LQJ�*RRGV�0RYHPHQW�IRU�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

-XQH����� ���

'LVSOD\LQJ�*RRGV�0RYHPHQW�IRU�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUVOnce you have planned the material for a maintenance order, you can display

• Whether there are goods receipts for the purchase orders for the order

• Which planned goods issues for the order have taken place

• Which unplanned goods issues for the order have taken place

Your System Administrator must define what data is to be displayed in the listusing the Customizing function.

As soon as this has been defined, you can create lists for orders that alreadyexist. To do this, use the report RIAUFM00.

To display goods movements for a maintenance order, perform the following two steps:

1. Select the maintenance order in the display or change mode.

2. In the header data screen, choose ([WUDV�→�*RRGV�PRYHPHQW.

The system displays a list of the goods movements that have taken place up untilnow for the maintenance order.

For editing the list, the usual list editing functions are available. For more information,see Working with Lists [Ext.].

Page 220: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�&RPSOHWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�&RPSOHWLRQThe process of maintenance order completion is subdivided into two main steps:

• Technical order completion

• Business completion of an order

The business completion requires the technical completion of the maintenance order.

You should complete a maintenance order only if:

• All data that refers to the reference object of the maintenance order is available andcorrect.

• All relevant data in the operations and sub-operations is available and correct.

See the following topics for detailed information:

• Technical Maintenance Order Completion [Page 221]

• Business Completion of a Maintenance Order [Page 225]

6SHFLDO�FDVH�

If you want to complete a maintenance order which was not carried out, refer toSetting the Status “Not Performed” [Page 227].

Page 221: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

7HFKQLFDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�&RPSOHWLRQ

-XQH����� ���

7HFKQLFDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�&RPSOHWLRQYou usually complete a maintenance order technically once the maintenance work planned in theorder has been carried out. The function for completing an order is used to record the followinginformation for the maintenance order:

• The system status "Technically completed" is set for the maintenance order.

• The order can only be changed as follows:

− You can lock and unlock it.

− You can post a goods receipt.

− You can change entries in the object list.

− You can flag it for deletion.

• The location and account assignment data specified for the order are set and can nolonger be changed. However, the order can still receive costs, for example throughincoming invoices for materials delivered and used.

If the settlement rule has not yet been maintained for the maintenance order, thesystem creates one automatically. If missing data makes this impossible, thesystem takes you to the screen for maintaining the settlement rule (see alsoSettlement Rule [Page 107]).

• The system flags all outstanding purchase requisitions for the order for deletion.

• The system clears all outstanding reservations for the maintenance order.

• The system clears all outstanding capacity scheduled for the order.

• The system also clears all notifications for the maintenance order, unless preventedby one of the following reasons:

− In the dialog box &RPSOHWH, the indicator &RPSOHWH�QRWLILFDWLRQ was not set.

− One or several tasks are still outstanding.

− A user status in the notification prevents it from been completed.

To complete a maintenance order technically, see Completing a Maintenance Order Technically[Page 223].

To reverse the technical completion of an order, see Resetting a Technical Completion [Page224].

When it becomes clear that there are no outstanding postings to be made to anorder, that its data will no longer be changed and that it is required only insummarized form for evaluation purposes, the maintenance order can becomepart of the maintenance history. At this point, the order is flagged for deletion andcan be transferred to the maintenance history using an archiving program.

Page 222: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

7HFKQLFDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�&RPSOHWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

The maintenance history contains order data, together with data from themaintenance notifications and the usage history data to assist you in evaluatingpast tasks and planning future ones.

30�2UGHU

CostsMaterialsOperations

0DVWHU�5HFRUGV

(TXLSPHQW )XQFWLRQDOORFDWLRQ

30

0DLQWHQDQFH�+LVWRU\

1RWLILFDWLRQ�KLVWRU\2UGHU�KLVWRU\8VDJH�KLVWRU\

1RWLILFDWLRQ

You will find more information on the maintenance history in 30���0DLQWHQDQFH+LVWRU\.

Page 223: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&RPSOHWLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�7HFKQLFDOO\

-XQH����� ���

&RPSOHWLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�7HFKQLFDOO\1. Select the maintenance order from the screen 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ with 2UGHUV

→ &KDQJH.

2. Choose 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → &RPSOHWH��WHFKQ�� → &RPSOHWH��WHFKQ���from theheader data screen or the operation overview.

The system displays the dialog box &RPSOHWH.

3. Check the entries in the dialog box and change them if necessary.

If you also want to complete the notifications assigned to the order, you must selectthe field &RPSOHWH�QRWLILFDWLRQV.

4. Choose &RPSOHWH.

The system completes the maintenance order technically, assigns it the appropriatestatus and saves it.

You can also execute this function for several orders. To find out how to do this,see Executing Order Functions in the List [Page 254].

Page 224: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5HVHWWLQJ�D�7HFKQLFDO�&RPSOHWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

5HVHWWLQJ�D�7HFKQLFDO�&RPSOHWLRQ1. Choose the maintenance order from the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen using

2UGHUV → &KDQJH.

2. In the header data screen or the operation overview, choose 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV →&RPSOHWH��WHFKQ���→�5HVHW.

The system resets the status “technically completed”. You can reprocess the order.

The notifications which you have also, if necessary, completed for the technicalcompletion of the order, are QRW automatically reset with the status ,1�352&(66,if you reset the technical completion of the order.

If you want to reprocess the notifications, you must assign this status individually.

Page 225: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

%XVLQHVV�&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

-XQH����� ���

%XVLQHVV�&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUAs a rule, you perform the business completion of a maintenance order when you no longerexpect any cost posting to the order. The business completion function for an order is used torecord the following information for the maintenance order:

• The system status “completed” is set for the maintenance order.

• The order is locked for further postings, even for postings of costs. This means thatorder settlement is only possible as long as the maintenance order has not hadbusiness completion.

A maintenance order can have business completion only when

• It has been completed technically

• Its balance is QLO

• No open purchase orders (commitments) exist for it.

If you want to perform the business completion for an order that has not yet been completedtechnically, the system first completes it technically. Then it checks whether or not the balance ofthe order is nil and whether any commitments still exist for it.

If the balance is nil and no open commitments still exist for it, the system performs the businesscompletion of the maintenance order.

If the balance is QRW nil and/or open commitments still exist, the system issues an error messageand sets the status “technically completed” for the order. You can then display the log, processthe maintenance order in order to balance it and then perform the function EXVLQHVV�FRPSOHWLRQagain.

To find out how to perform the business completion of a maintenance order, see Performing theBusiness Completion of a Maintenance Order [Page 226].

Page 226: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

3HUIRUPLQJ�WKH�%XVLQHVV�&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

��� -XQH�����

3HUIRUPLQJ�WKH�%XVLQHVV�&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�D�0DLQWHQDQFH2UGHUYou have the following two options to perform the business completion of maintenance orders,proceed as follows:

• You can perform business completion for an individual maintenance order.

• You can perform business completion for several maintenance orders by usingmultiple processing.

3HUIRUPLQJ�EXVLQHVV�FRPSOHWLRQ�IRU�LQGLYLGXDO�PDLQWHQDQFH�RUGHUV

1. Select the maintenance order from the screen 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ with 2UGHUV→ &KDQJH.

2. Choose 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → &RPSOHWLRQ → &RPSOHWH from the header data screenor the operation overview.

The system completes the maintenance order, assigns it the appropriate status andsaves it.

3HUIRUPLQJ�EXVLQHVV�FRPSOHWLRQ�IRU�VHYHUDO�PDLQWHQDQFH�RUGHUV�XVLQJPXOWLSOH�SURFHVVLQJ

1. In the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen, choose (QYLURQPHQW�→�0XOWLSOH�SURFHVVLQJ→�&RPSOHWH�RUGHU�

You go to the initial screen for multiple processing for order completion.

2. Perform all necessary and desired entries. The system’s F1 Help function will helpyou do this.

3. Choose Update VWDWXV�→�([HFXWH�

The system performs business completion for all maintenance orders that meet theentry conditions and requirements. The appropriate status is assigned to each oneand is then saved.

There is a log which provides you with information about these activities..

&DQFHOLQJ�WKH�%XVLQHVV�&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

You may cancel the status “completed” (= business completion) if, for example, you receive aninvoice for the work order after you completed the work order. To perform the businesscompletion of a maintenance order, proceed as follows:

1. Select the maintenance order from the screen 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ with 2UGHUV→ &KDQJH.

2. Choose 2UGHU → )XQFWLRQV → &RPSOHWLRQ → &DQFHO�FRPSO��from the header datascreen or the operation overview.

The system cancels the business completion of the maintenance order, deletes thestatus “completed”, assigns it the status “technically completed”, and saves it.

Page 227: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HWWLQJ�WKH�6WDWXV�³1RW�3HUIRUPHG´

-XQH����� ���

6HWWLQJ�WKH�6WDWXV�³1RW�3HUIRUPHG´You may want to complete a maintenance order that has not been performed because, forexample

• There was insufficient time for performance of the order

• The order was entered incorrectly

• The order was inadvertently entered into the system twice

You should give such orders the status “not performed”, so that when evaluating and checking itis clear that the planned tasks were not carried out. To set this status, perform the following threesteps:

1. Call up the maintenance order in change mode.

2. In the header data screen, choose 2UGHU�→�)XQFWLRQV�→�&RPSOHWH�→�1RW�SHUIRUPHG�

3. Confirm the prompt.

The system completes the maintenance order as described in Technical MaintenanceOrder Completion [Page 221] and Business Completion of a Maintenance Order[Page 225]. It sets the status “not performed” and saves the order.

Page 228: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HWWOHPHQW���2YHUYLHZ

��� -XQH�����

6HWWOHPHQW���2YHUYLHZThis section describes the settlement of maintenance orders.

&RVW�&KDUJHV�WR�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

When a maintenance order is processed by your maintenance staff, costs are incurred. Thesecosts are collected initially on the maintenance order itself and you can then use the high level ofintegration between the PM and CO Systems to display the costs and their causes in detail,allowing you to monitor your internal business processes more effectively. Maintenanceconsumption can be measured and charged to the maintenance order in terms of material andlabor costs, external services and so on.

:KDW�+DSSHQV�'XULQJ�2UGHU�6HWWOHPHQW"

During settlement, the costs collected on the maintenance order are passed on to the receiverspecified in the settlement rule for that order.

The receiver will invariably be an object in accounting, for example the cost center for afunctional location, the fixed asset to which the piece of equipment is allocated, or the main orderused to monitor the work carried out under several minor maintenance orders.

This receiver is identified using:

• A receiver type [Page 230]

for example, "cost center"

• A key for the receiver

for example, “511”

3UHFRQGLWLRQV�IRU�2UGHU�6HWWOHPHQW

The following requirements must be met before you can settle a maintenance order:

• The order must be released.

• The order must have status "Settlement rule created".

• The order should have incurred costs which have not yet been settled.

You will find out how to allocate maintenance cost in the PM System in Allocating Costs in thePM System [Page 229].

You will find out which settlement receivers are available in Settlement Receiver Types [Page230].

You will find out how to settle order costs in Settling a Maintenance Order [Page 233].

There is also a Settlement Example [Page 235], designed to illustrate the process in more detail.

Page 229: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$OORFDWLQJ�&RVWV�LQ�WKH�30�6\VWHP

-XQH����� ���

$OORFDWLQJ�&RVWV�LQ�WKH�30�6\VWHPIn the PM System, maintenance costs are allocated to individual technical objects (equipment,functional locations). Cost information can be tailored to the requirements of the individualmaintenance planner, who is then able to make statements regarding individual machines. Thesestatements can be summarized according to different criteria (for example, machine category)and used as a basis for cost comparisons and decision-making.

In the PM System, costs are allocated to the individual tasks carried out at an object by creatinga separate maintenance order for each task. The resulting costs are always charged to themaintenance order first, before being passed on to the appropriate receiver when the order issettled.

You will find out which settlement receivers are available in Settlement Receiver Types [Page230].

You will find out how to settle order costs in Settling a Maintenance Order [Page 233].

There is also a Settlement Example [Page 235], designed to illustrate the process in more detail.

Page 230: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HWWOHPHQW�5HFHLYHU�7\SHV

��� -XQH�����

6HWWOHPHQW�5HFHLYHU�7\SHVThe receiver of the costs of a maintenance order is usually independent of the reference object,which merely provides a proposal.

The system does not create separate settlement rules for the individual objectscontained in the object list of a maintenance order. If you want to identify thecosts individually for each object, you will have to create a separate maintenanceorder for each object.

5HFHLYHU�7\SHV

The following receiver types are always available:

• Cost center

• Fixed asset

• Project

• Order

• G/L account

6HWWOLQJ�WR�D�&RVW�&HQWHU

When settling a maintenance order to a cost center, you first have to collect the costs on theorder in question. The costs are then settled to the cost center in a separate process.

The receiver cost center might be the cost center responsible for the referenceobject, or it may be another cost center which you enter separately.

6HWWOLQJ�WR�D�)L[HG�$VVHW

When you settle a maintenance order to a fixed asset, you increase the value of the assetconcerned. Again, the costs are collected on the maintenance order and are then settled in aseparate process.

The receiver fixed asset might be the one to which all the objects allocated to theorder belong.

If you settle a maintenance order to a fixed asset you must enter an asset valuedate in the settlement rule.

6HWWOLQJ�WR�D�3URMHFW

If you are using the Project System to plan and monitor the activities and funds required for yourdifferent maintenance tasks, you can also settle your maintenance order costs to a project.

Page 231: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HWWOHPHQW�5HFHLYHU�7\SHV

-XQH����� ���

Again, the costs are first collected on the order before being settled to the project in a separateprocess.

The receiver project might be one used to plan and monitor the funds andactivities used in extensive maintenance work.

6HWWOLQJ�WR�DQ�2UGHU

You can also settle maintenance orders to other orders. The costs incurred for individualmeasures are first collected on the specific orders before being settled to the required receiver.

The receiver order might be a standing order for particular activities that are onlysettled once at the end of the year.

6HWWOLQJ�WR�D�*�/�$FFRXQW

You can settle the costs incurred by your maintenance orders to a G/L account in FI. As alwaysthe costs are first collected on the maintenance order and passed on to the G/L account in aseparate process.

The receiver account might be one you are using to capitalize costs if you are notusing SAP’s Asset Management System.

You will find out how to create a settlement rule for a maintenance order in Defining theSettlement Rule [Page 109].

You will find out how to settle order costs in Settling a Maintenance Order [Page 233].

There is also a Settlement Example [Page 235] designed to illustrate the process in more detail.

Page 232: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

8VLQJ�D�3URILW�&HQWHU

��� -XQH�����

8VLQJ�D�3URILW�&HQWHU

:KDW�LV�D�3URILW�&HQWHU"

You can use profit centers to define particular areas of responsibility within your organization.You can then identify an individual operating result for each individual profit center.

You might define the following areas of your business as individual profit centers:

• Maintenance

• Production

• Administration

3URILW�&HQWHUV�LQ�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

You can enter the relevant profit center in the +HDGHU�'HWDLO�'DWD screen of your maintenanceorder. You call up this screen using +HDGHU → $VVLJQPHQWV�→ *HQHUDO.

The system proposes the profit center from the cost center responsible for the relevant workcenter. You can enter a different profit center if you wish.

If you change the responsible work center in the maintenance order, the system will QRWautomatically change the profit center on the header screen. You must make any changerequired manually.

When you release the maintenance order, the system checks whether the responsible workcenter you entered is allocated to a different profit center from the one entered. If this is the case,the system makes an entry in the error log.

Until the maintenance order has incurred actual costs, you can change the profit center at anytime.

Page 233: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HWWOLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

-XQH����� ���

6HWWOLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUYou can settle maintenance orders in dialog or using the background processing functions.

With dialog processing, you can:

• Settle each order individually.

• Settle an entire group of maintenance orders at once.

To settle an order group, you must first have created it in the system.

You can perform a test run to simulate the results of the settlement process without posting anycosts.

The Settlement Example [Page 235] is designed to illustrate the process in more detail.

You will find more detailed information on the settlement functions in &2���6HWWOHPHQW.

6HWWOLQJ�DQ�,QGLYLGXDO�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

To settle an individual maintenance order, proceed as follows:

1. Select the settlement function from the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen using(QYLURQPHQW → 2UGHU�VHWWOHPHQW.

You see the initial settlement screen.

2. Enter where necessary the required controlling area and choose &RQWLQXH.

3. Enter the order number and any other required entries. If you want to perform a testrun, you should specify this here.

4. Choose 6HWWOHPHQW → ([HFXWH.

The system settles the maintenance order and displays the results in a log.

&UHDWLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�*URXS

To create a maintenance order group, proceed as follows:

1. Choose (QYLURQPHQW → 2UGHU�VHWWOHPHQW → 2UGHU�JURXSV → &UHDWH from the0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen.

2. Enter the appropriate controlling area and press &RQWLQXH.

You see the initial screen for creating an order group.

3. Enter a key for your order group and press ENTER.

You see the structure screen for the new order group.

4. Position the cursor on the key for the order group and choose (GLW → 6LQJOH�YDOXHV →0DLQWDLQ.

You see a dialog box.

5. Assign the required orders to the order group.

6. Choose &RQWLQXH.

The system adds the order numbers to the structure

7. Save the order group.

Page 234: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HWWOLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

��� -XQH�����

6HWWOLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�*URXS

To settle a maintenance order group, proceed as follows:

1. Choose (QYLURQPHQW → 2UGHU�VHWWOHPHQW�→�&ROOHFWLYH on the 0DLQWHQDQFH3URFHVVLQJ screen.

You see the initial screen for the settlement function.

2. Enter where necessary the required controlling area and choose &RQWLQXH.

You reach the initial screen for the settlement.

3. Choose the required selection variant and make all the necessary entries. If you wantto perform a test run, you should specify this here.

If you want to use your own selection variants, you should ask your systemadministrator to create these using the appropriate customizing function. You canuse the standard selection variant SAP_PM as a model.

4. Choose *RWR�→�6HOHFWLRQ�FULWHULD.

You see the selection screen.

5. Enter the name of the order group you want to settle along with any further requiredentries.

6. Press &RQWLQXH.

7. Start the settlement run using 6HWWOHPHQW�→�([HFXWH.

The system settles all the orders in the order group and displays the results in asettlement log.

Page 235: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HWWOLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

-XQH����� ���

6HWWOHPHQW�([DPSOHThe following example illustrates the creation and processing of a maintenance order from thepoint of view of order settlement.

7KH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

In a clarification plant, three pumps are to be cleaned in the pumping station. All three pumps areinstalled at the same functional location.

3ODQQLQJ�DQG�3ODQQLQJ�'DWD

The maintenance planner creates a maintenance order, enters the functional location C1-B01(pumping station) as a reference object and enters the three pumps in the object list. The order isto be settled to the pumping station cost center, which has the number 511. This means that allthe costs posted to the order for cleaning the three pumps will be settled to cost center 511 whenthe job is complete.

In detail, the order data comprises:

'DWD�RQ�WKH�SHUIRUPLQJ�ZRUN�FHQWHU�Ä36&³��SXPS�ILWWHUV�(QWU\

Number of persons carrying out the job 2

Sender cost center (= cost center of the employees carrying out the job) 909

Activity type Cleaning

Planned number of hours worked per person per pump 1

Cost of activity type per hour $150

Total planned work hours 6

Total labor costs $900

'DWD�RQ�WKH�SODQQHG�PDWHULDO (QWU\

Consumption posting to the amount of $150

5HOHDVLQJ�DQG�3URFHVVLQJ�WKH�2UGHU

Once the planning stage is complete, the maintenance planner releases the maintenance orderand the employees from work center "PSC" start the job:

• They withdraw the material planned for the maintenance order from the warehouse.Actual costs of $150 are incurred for the order and are posted immediately to theappropriate stock account.

• The employees confirm the length of time they worked on the order. It took them alittle longer than planned, so that the resulting actual costs posted to the maintenanceorder are $1050. These costs are credited to the sender work center.

6LWXDWLRQ�$IWHU�&RPSOHWLRQ�RI�WKH�-RE

Page 236: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HWWOLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

��� -XQH�����

After the work has been completed and the maintenance order settled, the debits are as follows:

Balance on the maintenance order: $0.00

Debit to the receiver cost center 511 (pumping station):$1200.00

Page 237: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

([WHUQDO�$VVLJQPHQW�RI�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVNV

-XQH����� ���

([WHUQDO�$VVLJQPHQW�RI�0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVNVThis section describes how the PM System can help you manage maintenance tasks awarded toexternal companies.

5HDVRQV�IRU�([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ�RI�7DVNV

In many companies, plant maintenance is carried out not only by the company’s own employees,but also by external firms. This could be for a number of reasons:

• Internal capacity shortages may mean that contracts have to be awarded externally,since the company’s own workshops cannot process any more orders.

• The qualifications required to maintain specialized machines are not represented inthe company’s own workshops. Specially trained employees from external companiesare needed.

• A cost comparison between internal and external labor ("Make or Buy") may revealthat it is more cost-effective to process the task externally rather than internally.

'HFLVLRQ�7LPH�IRU�([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ�RI�7DVNV

The decision in favor of external processing can be made as early as the planning stage of amaintenance task. However, a short-term switch from internal to external labor is often necessaryfor internal reasons. The ability to switch quickly and smoothly from internal to externalprocessing is therefore an important factor.

([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ�,QGLFDWRU

In the PM System you can distinguish between internal and external processing using a specialcontrol key in the operation.

You will find out how to represent external companies in the SAP System in RepresentingExternal Companies [Page 238].

You will find out how to assign tasks to external companies in:

• Assigning Individual Operations or Sub-Operations Externally [Page 240]

• Assigning the Entire Order Externally [Page 242]

You will find out to process external services in the system in Representing External Services[Page 243].

Page 238: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5HSUHVHQWLQJ�([WHUQDO�&RPSDQLHV

��� -XQH�����

5HSUHVHQWLQJ�([WHUQDO�&RPSDQLHVThe external companies to which you assign maintenance orders or individual operations mustbe stored in the system in the form of master records. There are two ways of doing this:

1. You create a vendor master record.

In this case, an external company is described by a vendor master record which ismaintained by accounting and purchasing.

2. You create a work center "External Company" which refers to a vendor.

To create a work center for plant maintenance, choose /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW0DLQWHQDQFH → :RUN�FHQWHUV.

Page 239: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$VVLJQLQJ�7DVNV�&RPSOHWHO\�RU�3DUWLDOO\

-XQH����� ���

$VVLJQLQJ�7DVNV�&RPSOHWHO\�RU�3DUWLDOO\In your maintenance order, you can specify that the work is to be carried out by some of yourown workshops and one or more external companies. This means you can assign differentproportions of the maintenance work to external companies.

You can assign the maintenance order:

• 3DUWLDOO\

Here, you assign individual operations or sub-operations of the maintenance order tothe external companies.

You will find out how to do this in Assigning Individual Operations or Sub-OperationsExternally [Page 240].

• &RPSOHWHO\

Here, you assign all the work on the maintenance order to an external company.

You will find out how to do this in Assigning the Entire Order Externally [Page 242].

Page 240: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$VVLJQLQJ�,QGLYLGXDO�2SHUDWLRQV�RU�6XE�2SHUDWLRQV�([WHUQDOO\

��� -XQH�����

$VVLJQLQJ�,QGLYLGXDO�2SHUDWLRQV�RU�6XE�2SHUDWLRQV([WHUQDOO\If you want to assign some of the jobs within a maintenance order to external companies, youcan do so using operations and sub-operations. In this way you are dividing a maintenance orderinto:

• One or more operations or sub-operations to be performed by the company’s ownworkshops

• One or more operations or sub-operations to be performed out by external workshops

To process operations or sub-operations externally, proceed as follows:

1. Select the 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ of the maintenance order.

2. Enter the operations and sub-operations which you want to assign to an externalcompany a control key which allows external processing and flag them.

Your system administrator will use a customizing function to define whether thecontrol key for external processing automatically triggers the creation of apurchase requisition or not.

The system will only create a purchase requisition automatically if the indicator([WHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ�UHTXLUHG in the field ([WHUQ3URF��is set for the control key youare using.

You can use external processing control keys that do not trigger a purchaserequisition if you are unsure whether an operation is to be processed externally ornot. The control key can then be used to show that you have already enteredexternal processing data.

3. Select the operations and/or sub-operations.

4. Choose 2SHUDWLRQ�→�([WHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ.

You see the screen ([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ�2SHUDWLRQ for the first selected operation orsub-operation.

5. Make all the necessary entries which describe the external labor to be performed andspecify the procurement options.

You can store the external processing data in the system in the form of defaultvalue profiles. These profiles are dependent on the user, the plant and the ordertype concerned and simplify data entry during external procurement of materialsand services.

The default value profiles are defined by your system administrator using theappropriate customizing functions.

6. Choose Operation�→�$GG��RSHUDWLRQV → 1H[W�RSHUDWLRQ to edit the externalprocessing data for the next operation/sub-operation.

Page 241: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

$VVLJQLQJ�,QGLYLGXDO�2SHUDWLRQV�RU�6XE�2SHUDWLRQV�([WHUQDOO\

-XQH����� ���

When you have processed all the selected operations and sub-operations, return tothe 2SHUDWLRQ�2YHUYLHZ screen.

7. Save the maintenance order.

When saving, the system creates purchase requisitions for the planned externalservices for operations with control keys indicated accordingly. You will find therespective purchase requisition number in the detail data screen for externalprocessing of operations/sub-operations.

You can use the customer exit COZF0001 to change purchase requisitions whichresult from external operations.

Before you use the enhancement, read the appropriate documentation.To do this, from the Sap menu, choose 7RROV�→�$%$3�:RUNEHQFK�→�8WLOLWLHV�→(QKDQFHPHQWV�→�'HILQLWLRQ.Enter the name of the enhancement.Then select 'RFXPHQWDWLRQ and choose 'LVSOD\.

Page 242: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$VVLJQLQJ�WKH�(QWLUH�2UGHU�([WHUQDOO\

��� -XQH�����

$VVLJQLQJ�WKH�(QWLUH�2UGHU�([WHUQDOO\In some cases, it may be necessary to assign an entire maintenance order to an externalcompany. To do this, create a maintenance order with a single operation which you processexternally. Then proceed in exactly the same way as described above in Assigning IndividualOperations or Sub-Operations Externally [Page 240].

Page 243: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

5HSUHVHQWLQJ�([WHUQDO�6HUYLFHV

-XQH����� ���

5HSUHVHQWLQJ�([WHUQDO�6HUYLFHVThe processing of external services is represented in the system in the following steps:

1. Based on the external processing data in the maintenance order, the systemautomatically creates a purchase requisition for those operations that you flagged forexternal processing using the control key.

For more information, see External Processing Data for an Operation [Page 244].

2. The responsible employee in the purchasing department creates a purchase orderbased on the purchase requisition.

For more information, see Ordering External Services [Page 245].

3. After "delivery", that is, after the external company has performed out the workordered, the system creates a completion confirmation for the purchase order in theform of a goods receipt.

For more information, see Confirming External Services [Page 246].

4. When the goods are received, the external labor costs are calculated and debited tothe maintenance order.

For more information, see Invoice Receipt and Debiting the Maintenance Order [Page247] and Settling External Services [Page 248].

Page 244: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ�'DWD�IRU�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ

��� -XQH�����

([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ�'DWD�IRU�DQ�2SHUDWLRQIf you have marked an operation as external using the control key, you must maintain externalprocessing data for it. There is a special screen in the system for this, which you fill in asdescribed above in Assigning Tasks Completely or Partially [Page 239].

Based on the data entered in this screen, the system creates the purchase requisition forexternal labor.

Your system administrator will use a customizing function to define whether thecontrol key for external processing automatically triggers the creation of apurchase requisition or not.

The system will only create a purchase requisition automatically if the indicator([WHUQDO�SURFHVVLQJ�UHTXLUHG in the field ([WHUQ3URF��is set for the control key youare using.

You can use external processing control keys that do not trigger a purchaserequisition if you are unsure whether an operation is to be processed externally ornot. The control key can then be used to show that you have already enteredexternal processing data.

Page 245: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

2UGHULQJ�([WHUQDO�6HUYLFHV

-XQH����� ���

2UGHULQJ�([WHUQDO�6HUYLFHVThe system creates a purchase requisition based on an external operation in the maintenanceorder. For more information, see Creating Purchase Requisitions [Page 217].

You will find the number of the purchase requisition in the external processing detail data screenfor the relevant operation or sub-operation.

In the next step, the responsible person from the purchasing department creates a purchaseorder. If the supplier is known, this can be done as described below:

1. Select the purchasing processing functions from the SAP main menu using /RJLVWLFV→�0DWHULDOV�PDQDJHPHQW�→�3XUFKDVLQJ.

2. Choose 3XUFKDVH�RUGHU�→�&UHDWH�→�9HQGRU�NQRZQ.

You see the initial screen for creating purchase orders.

3. Complete the initial screen and choose 3XUFKDVH�RUGHU�→�&UHDWH�Z��UHIHUHQFH�→7R�SXUFKDVH�UHT�

The system displays a dialog box, where you can enter selection criteria to help youfind the correct purchase requisition.

4. Press &RQWLQXH.

The system creates a list of all the purchase requisitions that meet the selectioncriteria.

5. Select the purchase requisition required and include the data in the purchase order.

6. Complete the fields of the purchase order and then save it.

In the maintenance order, on the external processing screen for the operation,you can see whether a purchase order has been created for the purchaserequisition or not. If it has, the field 3XUFKDVH�RUG��H[LVWV is flagged.

For more information, see Changing Order Data Relevant to Purchase Orders [Page 218].

You will find a more detailed description of the purchasing functions in the 00���3XUFKDVLQJ*XLGH.

Page 246: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&RQILUPLQJ�([WHUQDO�6HUYLFHV

��� -XQH�����

&RQILUPLQJ�([WHUQDO�6HUYLFHVYou do QRW confirm external services in the same way as ordinary confirmations of the timerequired for a job. Instead, you enter it as confirmation of an activity, in the form of a goodsreceipt for the purchase order. As a result, the activity is valued at the purchase order price andpassed on to the financial accounting department. The maintenance order which ordered theactivity is debited with this value.

Following a goods receipt for an external operation, the external operation automatically has thestatus (;7(51$/�23(5$7,21�3$57/<�'(/,9(5('. Only if the “delivery completed” indicatoris set for the goods receipt, does the operation have the status ([WHUQDO�RSHUDWLRQ�GHOLYHU\FRPSOHWHG.

In the maintenance order, on the external processing screen for the operation, you can seewhether a goods receipt has been posted for the purchase order or not. You can see the goodsreceipt quantity posted in the field *5�TW\.

Page 247: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

,QYRLFH�5HFHLSW�DQG�'HELWLQJ�WKH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

-XQH����� ���

,QYRLFH�5HFHLSW�DQG�'HELWLQJ�WKH�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUThe vendor invoice generally arrives after delivery. For this reason, the offsetting entry is postedto a clearing account and automatically cleared when the invoice is received. Any variancesbetween the value of the goods ordered and the invoice value are debited or credited accordinglyto the order.

It is generally left to the inventory management department to post the goods receipt and checkthe invoice. For a more detailed description of the functions required, see 00���,QYHQWRU\0DQDJHPHQW�*XLGH and 00���,QYRLFH�9HULILFDWLRQ�*XLGH.

Page 248: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HWWOLQJ�([WHUQDO�6HUYLFHV

��� -XQH�����

6HWWOLQJ�([WHUQDO�6HUYLFHVThere are two different methods available for settling external services:

• Settlement on a wage hour basis

• Settlement on a total performance basis

The settlement type of each external operation depends on the data you entered in the externaldata screen:

• If you specified the number of hours to be worked, the operation is settled on a wagehour basis.

• If you specified a total operating performance (for example, "change 3 engines"), theoperation is settled on a total operating performance basis.

Page 249: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

8VLQJ�7DVN�/LVWV�IRU�([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ

-XQH����� ���

8VLQJ�7DVN�/LVWV�IRU�([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJExternal companies often specialize in repairing and maintaining particular plants or parts ofplants. The jobs that they perform are always the same activities which have possibly alreadybeen described by the manufacturer. In such cases, you can create task lists for externalprocessing in the system.

6HOHFWLQJ�7DVN�/LVWV�IRU�([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ

Task lists for external processing must be characterized as such. For this reason, you must flagthe individual operations as external operations using a control key.

You will find a detailed description on how to create task lists in the system in 30���0DQDJLQJ0DLQWHQDQFH�7DVN�/LVW.

,QWHJUDWLQJ�D�7DVN�/LVW�IRU�([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ

You integrate task lists for external processing into maintenance orders in exactly the same wayas task lists for internal processing (see Contents: Work Scheduling with Tasks Lists [Page 156]).

3URFHVVLQJ�D�7DVN�/LVW�IRU�([WHUQDO�3URFHVVLQJ

The system automatically creates purchase requisitions for the operations of a task list forexternal processing.

Completion confirmation and settlement of the operations of a task list for external processing areperformed exactly as described in Representing External Services [Page 243].

Page 250: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6HOHFWLRQ�RI�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV�DQG�2SHUDWLRQV�8VLQJ�/LVWV

��� -XQH�����

6HOHFWLRQ�RI�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV�DQG�2SHUDWLRQV�8VLQJ/LVWV

8VHStandard functions are available in the PM application component for selecting maintenanceorders and their operations. You can use these to choose one or more maintenance orders ororder operations for changing or displaying.

You use the selection function for maintenance orders in the following situations:

• You want to change or display a certain maintenance order or operation, but youdon’t know the order number.

• You want to change or display seceral maintenance orders or operations which havecertain features.

• You want to obtain an overview of maintenance orders or operations which havecertain features.

• You want to execute the same function for certain maintenance orders, for example,to release, print or complete them.

Special functions are available for processing selection lists which make the editing of lists moreeffective.

List editing is also available for displaying completion confirmations. For moreinformation, see Displaying Completion Confirmations Generally [Ext.].

3UHUHTXLVLWHVTo be able to create and edit an order or operation listm you must choose the required menupath:

/LVW�W\SH 0HQX�SDWK

Change single-level order list /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFHSURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → /LVW�HGLWLQJ → &KDQJH

Display single-level order list /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFHSURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → /LVW�HGLWLQJ → 'LVSOD\

Change single-level operation list /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFHSURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → 2SHUDWLRQ�OLVWH → &KDQJH

Display single-level operation lists /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFHSURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV → 2SHUDWLRQ�OLVW → 'LVSOD\

Display multi-level order list /RJLVWLFV → 3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH → 0DLQWHQDQFHSURFHVVLQJ → 2UGHUV →�/LVW�HGLWLQJ�→�'LVSOD\�PXOWL�OHYHO�.

Page 251: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6HOHFWLRQ�RI�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV�DQG�2SHUDWLRQV�8VLQJ�/LVWV

-XQH����� ���

)HDWXUHVStandard functions are available for creating and processing order and operation lists. You canfind a description of these functions in Working with Lists [Ext.].

In addition, other order-specific list editing functions are also available:

• Displaying the Portfolio Graphic [Page 252]

You can display a portfolio graphic (analysis instrument for strategic companyplanning) for each list column selected.

This can answer questions such as:What is the ratio between the number of orders for a piece of equipment and the levelof costs caused by this equipment?

• Displaying the Scheduling Overview Graphic [Page 253]

In a list of orders or operations, you can display a scheduling overview graphic forselected orders.

• Executing Order Functions in the List [Page 254]

In a list of maintenance orders, you can implement certain functions for selectedmaintenance orders. You can, for example, release, print or complete a certainnumber of maintenance orders.

• Creating an Order List for Each Settlement Receiver [Page 258]

You can create a list for which you also enter the order settlement data as selectionparameters.

Page 252: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'LVSOD\LQJ�WKH�3RUWIROLR�*UDSKLF

��� -XQH�����

'LVSOD\LQJ�WKH�3RUWIROLR�*UDSKLF1. Position the cursor on the required list column for which you want to represent a

portfolio.

2. Choose /LVW�→�3RUWIROLR�

The system displays the portfolio representation.

Using the 6HWWLQJV menu, you can change the axes, colors and so on.

3. You return to the list using 3RUWIROLR�→�([LW.

Page 253: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'LVSOD\LQJ�WKH�6FKHGXOLQJ�2YHUYLHZ�*UDSKLF

-XQH����� ���

'LVSOD\LQJ�WKH�6FKHGXOLQJ�2YHUYLHZ�*UDSKLF1. Select the lines with the required maintenance orders/operations, for which you want

to display a scheduling overview.

2. Choose *RWR�→�6FKHGXOLQJ�RYHUYLHZ.

The system displays the scheduling overview graphic.

Using the 6HWWLQJV menu, you can change the colors, amongst other things.

3. Return to the list using *UDSKLF�→�([LW.

Page 254: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

([HFXWLQJ�2UGHU�)XQFWLRQV�LQ�WKH�/LVW

��� -XQH�����

([HFXWLQJ�2UGHU�)XQFWLRQV�LQ�WKH�/LVW1. Create an order list. To do this, choose /RJLVWLFV�→�3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH�→

0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ�→�2UGHUV�→�/LVW�HGLWLQJ�→�&KDQJH.

For an exact description of how to create a list, see Working with Lists [Ext.].

2. Select the required maintenance orders in the list.

3. Choose the required function for which all the selected orders should be performed,using 2UGHU�→��UHTXLUHG�IXQFWLRQ!.

If you want to print shop papers for different orders at the same time, see PrintingShop Papers for Several Orders in the List [Page 255].

The system executes the functions for all the maintenance orders selected andinforms you of this in an on-line message.

Page 255: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�IRU�6HYHUDO�2UGHUV�LQ�WKH�/LVW

-XQH����� ���

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�IRU�6HYHUDO�2UGHUV�LQ�WKH�/LVW

8VHYou use this function if you want to print shop papers for several orders at the same time.

3UHUHTXLVLWHVBefore you can print shop papers, you must create an order list.

• You can generally only print shop papers if the control key for the operationallows this, for example, if the indicator 3ULQW is active for the control key.

• For the order, the standard system requires that:

� The system status 5(/($6(' is set, if you want to print

� The order is not completed, if you want to print

)HDWXUHVYou can use this function to print shop papers for several orders in a created order list at thesame time.

6HH�

Creating a List and Selecting Orders [Page 256]

Printing Shop Papers for Several Orders at Once [Page 257]

6HH�DOVR�

Printing/Faxing Shop Papers [Page 200]

Page 256: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�D�/LVW�DQG�6HOHFWLQJ�2UGHUV

��� -XQH�����

&UHDWLQJ�D�/LVW�DQG�6HOHFWLQJ�2UGHUV1. Create an order list. To do this, choose /RJLVWLFV�→�3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH�→

0DLQWHQDQFH�SURFHVVLQJ�→�2UGHUV�→�/LVW�HGLWLQJ�→�&KDQJH.

For an exact description of how to create a list, see Working with Lists [Ext.].

2. In the created list, select the maintenance orders for which you want to print shoppapers.

3. Now proceed with Printing Shop Papers for Several Orders in the List [Page 255].

Page 257: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�IRU�6HYHUDO�2UGHUV�DW�2QFH

-XQH����� ���

3ULQWLQJ�6KRS�3DSHUV�IRU�6HYHUDO�2UGHUV�DW�2QFH

3UHUHTXLVLWHVFor this procedure, you can only print those shop papers for the selected orders which thesystem administration has selected in your system using the Customizing function. If no shoppapers have been selected, the system cannot print anything out.

3URFHGXUH1. In the created order list, select those orders for which you want to print shop papers.

2. Choose 2UGHU�→�3ULQW�RUGHU.

5HVXOW• The system prints/faxes/archives the shop papers for the selected objects according

to the specifications in your system.

If no shop papers are sent to the output device specified, check whether:

• Shop papers were indicated as the dafault in Customizing

• Your print order is in the spool

• The settings for the control key allow printing

• The print diversion is active

• The selected objects receive the status “printed”.

2SHUDWLRQ�VWDWXV

An operation receives the status 3ULQWHG from the system, as soon as a shoppaper, which has been set in Customizing with the indicator 2SHUDWLRQ�VWDWXV, isprinted for it.

If the indicator 2SHUDWLRQ�VWDWXV has not been set in Customizing for any of theshop papers, the system can never give the operations the status SULQWHG.

2UGHU�VWDWXV

An order only receives the status 3DUWO\�SULQWHG, if its operations already had thestatus SULQWHG, when a new operation was added.

Page 258: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�/LVW�IRU�(DFK�6HWWOHPHQW�5HFHLYHU

��� -XQH�����

&UHDWLQJ�DQ�2UGHU�/LVW�IRU�(DFK�6HWWOHPHQW�5HFHLYHU1. Choose list editing using of the menu paths listed in Selection of Maintenance Orders

and Operations Using Lists [Page 250].

You reach a screen with selection options.

2. Enter the necessary data.

For more information about creating lists, see Working with Lists [Ext.].

3. Choose 6HWWOHPHQW�UHFHLYHU.

You reach a further selection screen in which you can makespecial entries for thesettlement receiver.

4. Enter the necessary data and start the selection with�([HFXWH.

The system creates a list of maintenance orders which correspond to your selectioncriteria.

For more information about editing lists, see:

− Working with Lists [Ext.]

− Displaying the Portfolio Graphic [Page 252]

− Displaying the Scheduling Overview Graphic [Page 253]

− Executing Order Functions in the List [Page 254]

− Printing Shop Papers for Several Orders in the List [Page 255]

Page 259: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6WDWXV�0DQDJHPHQW���2YHUYLHZ

-XQH����� ���

6WDWXV�0DQDJHPHQW���2YHUYLHZThis section describes the status management functions available with maintenance orders.

The individual processing steps carried out in the planning and execution stages are defined inthe system as business transactions, which the user performs on the maintenance order. Thesystem documents each of these transactions with a new status. Thus the progress made inplanning and processing a maintenance order can be documented using the different systemstatuses.

There are two different types of status:

• System Status [Page 260]

• User Status [Page 261]

Page 260: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6\VWHP�6WDWXV

��� -XQH�����

6\VWHP�6WDWXVIn SAP status management, system statuses are set automatically by the system in response todifferent business transactions. The system status informs the user that a particular transactionhas been performed for the maintenance order concerned.

A maintenance order can have different system statuses active during the planning andexecution phases. There are only a few statuses which must be active at particular times.

A maintenance order can have two different types of system status:

1. System statuses that are set when you perform certain order-related systemfunctions.

When you perform the function "release order", the system automatically setsthe status "Released" for the relevant order.

2. System statuses set when employees from other departments perform a businesstransaction which affects the maintenance order.

An employee in the purchasing department creates a purchase order for amaterial in response to a purchase requisition for a maintenance order. Thesystem automatically set the status "Material purchase order" for the orderconcerned.

You will find out how to display status information and the allowed and prohibited transactions inDisplaying Status Information and Allowed Operations [Page 262].

You will find out how to display an overview of all the active statuses in Displaying a GeneralOverview of Active Statuses [Page 263].

Page 261: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

8VHU�6WDWXV

-XQH����� ���

8VHU�6WDWXVWith user statuses, you can further restrict the business transactions allowed for the currentsystem status.

You create the user statuses you need within your business using the appropriate customizingfunction and enter them in status profiles. The status profile is then assigned to the relevant ordertype(s).

You can set and delete the user statuses defined in your system, provided you haveauthorization to do this.

You will find out how to display status information and the allowed and prohibited transactions inDisplaying Status Information and Allowed Operations [Page 262].

You will find out how to display an overview of all the active statuses in Displaying a GeneralOverview of Active Statuses [Page 263].

Page 262: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

'LVSOD\LQJ�6WDWXV�,QIRUPDWLRQ�DQG�$OORZHG�2SHUDWLRQV

��� -XQH�����

'LVSOD\LQJ�6WDWXV�,QIRUPDWLRQ�DQG�$OORZHG�2SHUDWLRQVTo call up the status information and display the allowed operations for a maintenance order,proceed as follows:

1. Choose +HDGHU → 6WDWXV from the header data screen of the maintenance order.

You see the screen 6WDWXV��SURFHVVLQJ�PRGH!.

In the column 6\VWHP6WDWXV you see a list of all the system statuses currently activefor the order.

If the user status has been assigned to the order type concerned, you see a list of anyuser statuses currently active for the order in the column 8VHU6WDWXV.

The list of the active statuses and the status field in the order header are notready for input. You can only assign a new status to a maintenance order bycarrying out the appropriate business transaction for it.

2. You can display the allowed business transactions for the current status by choosing([WUDV → %XV��WUDQVDFWLRQV...

The system displays a dialog box with a list of all the business transactions that canbe carried out for the maintenance order at this time.

You will find out how to display an overview of all the active statuses in Displaying a GeneralOverview of Active Statuses [Page 263].

Page 263: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'LVSOD\LQJ�D�*HQHUDO�2YHUYLHZ�RI�$FWLYH�6WDWXVHV

-XQH����� ���

'LVSOD\LQJ�D�*HQHUDO�2YHUYLHZ�RI�$FWLYH�6WDWXVHVTo obtain a general overview of the planning steps already carried out and the statuses currentlyactive, proceed as follows:

1. Choose +HDGHU → 6WDWXV on the header data screen of the maintenance order.

You see the screen 6WDWXV��SURFHVVLQJ�PRGH! with all the system and user statusesactive for the maintenance order at this time.

2. Choose ([WUDV → 2YHUYLHZ.

The system displays a dialog box with all the active and inactive (that is, formerlyactive), system and user statuses.

You will find out how to display status information and the allowed and prohibited transactions inDisplaying Status Information and Allowed Operations [Page 262].

Page 264: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6XPPDU\�RI�WKH�0RVW�,PSRUWDQW�2UGHU�6WDWXVHV

��� -XQH�����

6XPPDU\�RI�WKH�0RVW�,PSRUWDQW�2UGHU�6WDWXVHVThe following list gives you an overview of the most important order statuses along with theirprerequisites, effects and special features.

6WDWXV�³&UHDWHG´

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The order is created.

(IIHFWV

• Reservations may be available, but they cannot be withdrawn and are not applicableto MRP.

• Purchase requisitions are available, but goods receipt postings are not possible.

• Technical completion is possible.

6SHFLDO�IHDWXUHV

• Reservations and purchase requisitions can be created at a defined time (but uponorder release at the latest) if the relevant indicator is set.

• It can be defined in Customizing that a default accounting rule should be created onthe basis of the object when the order is created.

6WDWXV�³5HOHDVHG´

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The user status cannot prevent release.

(IIHFWV

• The system checks material and PRT availability.

• It checks for outstanding permits.

• It checks what was defined in user exits.

• Reservations can now be withdrawn and are applicable to MRP.

• Purchase requisitions are written.

• Goods receipt postings are possible.

• Printing is possible.

• Completion confirmations are possible.

• Settlement is possible as from this status, for example, for a simultaneous costdisplay for the recipient.

6SHFLDO�IHDWXUHV

• The checks can be set in Customizing.

• It can be defined in Customizing that the order release is allowed only when theaccounting rule is maintained.

Page 265: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6XPPDU\�RI�WKH�0RVW�,PSRUWDQW�2UGHU�6WDWXVHV

-XQH����� ���

6WDWXV�³3DUWLDOO\�FRQILUPHG´

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

• The user status cannot prevent confirmation.

• Individual completion confirmations have already been entered for operations or theorder header.

(IIHFWV

The maintenance planner sees that the performance of maintenance tasks is already underway.Changes to the order should be made only in cases of urgency and after the planner hasensured that the workers on the shop floor have been made aware of the changes.

6SHFLDO�IHDWXUHV

You can enter partial confirmations for the order header and for individual operations.

6WDWXV�³)LQDOO\�FRQILUPHG´

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

• The user status cannot prevent final confirmation.

• The maintenance tasks entered in the order have been completed by the manualworkers.

(IIHFWV

Final confirmation reduces the capacity requirements and sets the status “finally confirmed”.

6SHFLDO�IHDWXUHV

When the manual workers flag the field &RPSOHWH in the order, the remaining capacityrequirements are reduced, but the status “finally confirmed” is not set. This status is set onlywhen the maintenance planner sets it explicitly.

6WDWXV�³7HFKQLFDOO\�FRPSOHWHG´

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

• The user status cannot prevent technical completion.

• A settlement rule must be available.

(IIHFWV

• The order is complete for maintenance.

• It can only be changed online as follows:

− You can lock and unlock it.

− You can post goods receipts for the order.

− You can change entries in the object list.

− You can set the deletion flag.

• The location and account assignment data entered for the maintenance order is fixedand can no longer be changed.

Page 266: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

6XPPDU\�RI�WKH�0RVW�,PSRUWDQW�2UGHU�6WDWXVHV

��� -XQH�����

• Costs can still be posted to the order (for example, resulting from invoice receipts fordelivered and used materials).

• All remaining purchase orders for the maintenance order are provided with a deletionflag.

• All remaining reservations for the maintenance order are reduced.

• Capacities which were planned for the maintenance order and are still open arereduced.

• Goods receipt postings are still possible.

6SHFLDO�IHDWXUHV

None

6WDWXV�³&RPSOHWHG�IRU�EXVLQHVV´

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

• The user status cannot prevent business completion.

• The order is technically completed.

• The order is fully settled and has a zero balance.

(IIHFWV

• The maintenance order is indicated as fully completed.

• It can no longer be posted, including postings of costs.

• It is locked for all processing changes. Order settlement is possible only if the order isnot completed for business.

6SHFLDO�IHDWXUHV

If you want to perform business completion, but the order is still not technically completed, thesystem first performs technical completion. Before proceeding to business completion it checkswhether the order has a zero balance. If it has, it also performs business completion; if not, anerror message is output and the order is given the status “technically completed”. You can thenedit the order accordingly and perform the business completion function again.

6WDWXV�³/RFNHG´

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The user status cannot prevent locking.

(IIHFWV

• The order is locked against any changes.

• It can only be unlocked again.

• Capacity load records are canceled.

• If purchase requisitions were created when the order was released, they still exist butpurchase orders are not possible.

Page 267: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

6XPPDU\�RI�WKH�0RVW�,PSRUWDQW�2UGHU�6WDWXVHV

-XQH����� ���

6SHFLDO�IHDWXUHV

Orders are usually locked after release so that planning changes can be made relatively easily.

6WDWXV�³'HOHWLRQ�IODJ�DFWLYDWHG´

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The user status cannot prevent the deletion flag being set.

(IIHFWV

• The system checks whether the order can be deleted (for example, the order musthave a zero balance).

• When the reorganization program runs next time, the deletion flag is set and the orderis then deleted from the database and written to the archive.

6SHFLDO�IHDWXUHV

None

Page 268: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

(YDOXDWLQJ�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV���2YHUYLHZ

��� -XQH�����

(YDOXDWLQJ�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV���2YHUYLHZThis section describes how to evaluate the data from maintenance orders in order to analyzepast tasks and to plan future ones. There are several help functions available for this:

• You can create a OLVW�RI�PDLQWHQDQFH�RUGHUV according to different criteria, fromwhich you can select individual orders either to plan them in more detail or to call upanalyses.

For more information, see Using a Maintenance Order List [Page 269].

• You can create a OLVW�RI�RSHUDWLRQV according to different criteria, from which youaccess the corresponding orders, either to plan them in more detail or to call upanalyses.

For more information, see Using an Operation List [Page 270].

• You can display an RYHUYLHZ of all the PDWHULDOV to be used when carrying out thetasks for a particular order.

For more information, see Displaying all the Materials in a Maintenance Order [Page271].

• You can create an overview of all the changes which were made to the fields of theorder when it was processed.

For more information, see Action Log for the Order [Page 272].

• You can use the Plant Maintenance information system to evaluate your orders. Youcall it up from the main SAP menu using /RJLVWLFV�→�3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH�→,QIRUPDWLRQ�V\VWHP.

For more information on the Plant Maintenance information system, see the SAPdocument LO - Logistics Information System [Ext.].

Page 269: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

8VLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�/LVW

-XQH����� ���

8VLQJ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU�/LVWUsing the maintenance order list editing function, you can create lists of maintenance ordersaccording to different criteria.

You select the list editing function from the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen with 2UGHUV�→�/LVWHGLWLQJ�→�'LVSOD\.

For more information on how to use the maintenance order list function, see Selection ofMaintenance Orders and Operations Using Lists [Page 250].

For more information on list editing, see Working with Lists [Ext.].

Page 270: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

8VLQJ�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ�/LVW

��� -XQH�����

8VLQJ�DQ�2SHUDWLRQ�/LVWUsing the maintenance order operation selection function, you can create lists of operations andsub-operations in the order according to different criteria.

You select this function from the 0DLQWHQDQFH�3URFHVVLQJ screen with Orders�→�2SHUDWLRQ�OLVW�→'LVSOD\.

For more information on using the list functions, see Selection of Maintenance Orders andOperations Using Lists [Page 250].

For more information on list editing, see Working with Lists [Ext.].

Page 271: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

'LVSOD\LQJ�DOO�WKH�0DWHULDOV�LQ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHU

-XQH����� ���

'LVSOD\LQJ�DOO�WKH�0DWHULDOV�LQ�D�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUYou can display all the materials to be used in carrying out the tasks in a maintenance order inan overview. To do this, proceed as follows:

1. Select the required maintenance order.

2. Choose *RWR�→�&RPSRQHQW�RYHUYLHZ in the header data screen of the maintenanceorder.

You see the screen &RPSRQHQW�2YHUYLHZ, which contains all the materials allocatedto the order.

Page 272: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

$FWLRQ�/RJ�IRU�WKH�2UGHU

��� -XQH�����

$FWLRQ�/RJ�IRU�WKH�2UGHU

8VH

You use the $FWLRQ�ORJ�function if want to obtain an overview of all the changes which were madeto the fields of the order when it was processed.

)HDWXUHV

The action log shows you:

• When the changes were made (date and time)

• Who made the changes

• Which fields were changed

• Which data the fields contained EHIRUH the change

• Which data the fields contain DIWHU the changes

$FWLYLWLHV

You call up the $FWLRQ�ORJ function in the order by choosing +HDGHU�→�'RFXPHQWV�IRU�RUGHU�→$FWLRQ�ORJ.

Page 273: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

5HIXUELVKPHQW�RI�5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUHV�8VLQJ�5HIXUELVKPHQW�2UGHUV

-XQH����� ���

5HIXUELVKPHQW�RI�5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUHV�8VLQJ5HIXUELVKPHQW�2UGHUV

3XUSRVHIn production plants or other technical objects, high value components are often used (pumps,motors etc.) which are replaced in case of damage by a functional repairable spare and thenrefurbished using a separate order.

These functions are important for companies for which system availability is a critical factor (forexample, the process industry, oil producing and processing, steel) and for which repairablespares guarantee a high level of system availability. The refurbishment of - usually high value -defective repairable spares is of considerable economic importance for these companies and isoften a core process in Plant Maintenance.

,QWURGXFWRU\�1RWHIt is advisable to define in your system using the Customizing function an internal order typewhich you indicate for refurbishment. However, you can also have an already exisitng order typefor refurbishment.

,QWHJUDWLRQIn addition to the Plant Maintenance functions, functions from inventory management andmaterials planning are also used for the refubishment of repairable spares.

)HDWXUHVRepairable spares are procured and placed in storage. Over time, they are used in productionand when worn out or defective, they are returned to the warehouse.

If there is a certain number of non-functional repairable spares in the warehouse, themaintenance planner responsible creates a refurbishment order for them.

The maintenance planner uses a refurbishment order to plan a status change for the repairablespares of a material. The initial status is therefore “to be refurbished”, the target status“refurbished”. The planner then releases the order and monitors the implementation of this statuschange.

The repairable spares to be refurbished are again checked into the warehouse and, wherenecessary, revaluated. They are now in full working order and can be used to plan materialrequirements and subsequently used.

/LPLWDWLRQVConsideration of “good parts” (functional parts) and “bad parts” (non-functional parts) is notprovided in materials planning.

Page 274: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5HIXUELVKPHQW�2UGHU

��� -XQH�����

5HIXUELVKPHQW�2UGHU

'HILQLWLRQA special feature of the maintenance order which you use for the refurbishment of repairablespares and for which an order type must be indicated specially.

8VHYou use the refurbishment order to contract a work center to restore a certain number ofdefective/worn out repairable spares to full working order at a certain date.

The order can refer to the following types of repairable spare:

• One or more individual repairable spares (combination of material and serial number,for which an equipment master record can also be created, if necessary

• One or more non-individual repairable spares (material)

The repairable spares scheduled in the order are brought from a uniform initial condition to auniform end condition. You can distinguish these conditions using batches or different valuationtypes.

In the order, you document the individual phases of refurbishment:

• Planning

• Release

• Implementation

• Completion confirmation

• Entry of costs and settlement

6WUXFWXUHThe structure of the refurbishment order corresponds in essence to the structure of themaintenance order. In addition, it also provides the following:

• An object list, in which you can identify all the repairable spares which should berefurbished by using their material serial numbers and recognise whether equipmentmaster records exist for them

• The option of making the following entries:

− Origin, quantity and future storage location (if necessary, with batch and valuationtype) of the objects to be refurbished

− Status of the refurbishment (number of objects already refurbished)

− Dates for refurbishment

Page 275: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUH

-XQH����� ���

5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUH

'HILQLWLRQAn inventory-managed single unit of material which can be uniquely identified by a combinationof material and serial numbers, with an additional equipment master record if necessary.

8VHRepairable spares are reserves in the warehouse for certain critical and high-value components,so that these parts can be replaced immediately in the case of a breakdown. In certain cases,intact repairable spares must also be available in certain quantities for legal reasons.

Repairable spares can be refurbished many times for defects or wear and then made availableagain as spare parts.

6WUXFWXUHRepairable spares are managed in the system in the form of material master records.

To be able to identify single units of a material, you have the option of assigning serial numbers.However, to do this, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled in your system:

• A serial number profile is assigned to the material master record.

• The operation 33$8 must be assigned to the profile.

• For the operation 33$8, the serial number allocation must be allowed in the field6HULDO�QXPEHU�XVH.

You can create an equipment master recors for a serialized single unit of material.

,QWHJUDWLRQRepairable spares can be managed in an inventory.

The refurbishment of defective or worn-out repairable spares is represented using refurbishmentorders.

For more information about serial number management, see Management of Serial Numbers[Ext.].

Page 276: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5HIXUELVKPHQW�RI�5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUHV

��� -XQH�����

5HIXUELVKPHQW�RI�5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUHV

3XUSRVHIt is always advisable to refurbish repairable spares if the defect can be resolved or the wear isreversible. The repair/refurbishment of repairable spares is often much more cost-effective than anew purchase.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV• A material master record must be created in the system for the repairable spares.

• A unique identification is only possible if the single units of the material have beenserialized.

3URFHVV�)ORZThe following graphic provides an overview of the process flow for the refurbishment ofrepairable spares:

The process flow is described in detail below:

��� 3URFXUHPHQW�RI�UHSDLUDEOH�VSDUHV

For certain critical and high-value components which are used in a technical system,you procure repairable spares so that you can replace the components immediately inthe case of a breakdown.

The procurement of repairable spares is made by Materials Management. Therepairable spares are orderes and delivered. A material master record for therepairable spares is created in the system. If required, the repairable spares can be

Page 277: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

5HIXUELVKPHQW�RI�5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUHV

-XQH����� ���

serialized for goods receipt in the intended storage location as single units of material,assigned to a batch and valuated.

For more information, see MM - Inventory Management, Special Stocks and SampleInventory [Ext.].

��� :LWKGUDZDO�RI�LQWDFW�UHSDLUDEOH�VSDUHV�UHWXUQ�RI�GHIHFWLYH�UHSDLUDEOH�VSDUHV

If a material (single unit) managed as a repairable spare is defective at a technicalsystem, it must be replaced by an intact repairable spare. For this, the defectiverepairable spare is dismantled from the technical system and returned to thewarehouse, whilst an intast repairable spare is withdrawn fron the warehouse andinstalled in the technical system.

For more information, see MM - Inventory Management, Special Stocks and SampleInventory [Ext.].

You can register single units of material with their serial numbers when taking them toand from the warehouse.

You can plan and implement installation/dismantling with the usual maintenanceorder.

If the repairable spares involved are pieces of equipment which are installed anddismantled at functional locations, you can represent the installation and dismantlingin the system. In addition, it is entered into the maintenance history.

For more information, see PM - Structuring Technical Systems [Ext.].

��� &UHDWLRQ�RI�WKH�UHIXUELVKPHQW�RUGHU

As soon as there is a certain quantity of defective repairable spares in the warehouse,the maintenance planner responsible creates a refurbishment order.

In this order, the planner plans how many - if necessary, identified uniquely by serialnumber - inventory-managed repairable spares of a certain material are to berefurbished. This can also apply for pieces of equipment which are identifed usingtheir material and serial number combination.

The maintenance planner defines the timeframe for the refurbishment and schedulesall the necessary operations, materials, utilities and so on for the refurbishment.

For more information, see Create Refurbishment Order [Page 279].

��� 2UGHU�UHOHDVH

Following the completion of the planning activities, the refurbishment order isreleased. This means that the work can be started.

For more information, see Order Release [Page 151].

��� :LWKGUDZDO�IURP�WKH�ZDUHKRXVH

The employees responsible for the refurbishment withdraw from the warehouse thedefective/worn-out repairable spares as well as all other materials scheduled in theorder which are required for the refurbishment.

For more information, see Issuing Planned Stock Material [Page 214].

��� &RPSOHWLRQ�FRQILUPDWLRQ

Page 278: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

5HIXUELVKPHQW�RI�5HSDLUDEOH�6SDUHV

��� -XQH�����

The employees responsible for the refurbishment enter completion confirmations forthe refurbishment order. These completion confirmations make clear how the work isprogressing.

For more information, see The Central Confirmation Function [Ext.].

The maintenance of notifications is not intended for the refurbishment order.

��� 5HWXUQ�WR�WKH�ZDUHKRXVH

The repaired/refurbished repairable spares are returned to the warehouse per goodsreceipt according to the planning in the order.

To help you with this, the object list is called up from the refurbishment order. You canthen use this to identify the individual repairable spares.

For more information, see MM - Inventory Management, Special Stocks and SampleInventory [Ext.].

For repairable spares which are not to be refurbished again, you cancel thereservation and post a scrapping.

��� 2UGHU�FRPSOHWLRQ

As soon as the refurbishment is completed, the order can be completed.

For more information, see Completion of a Maintenance Order [Page 26].

Page 279: VeryGood PM Order

�6$3�$* 30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV

&UHDWH�5HIXUELVKPHQW�2UGHU

-XQH����� ���

&UHDWH�5HIXUELVKPHQW�2UGHU1. From the SAP menu, choose /RJLVWLFV�→�3ODQW�0DLQWHQDQFH�→�0DLQWHQDQFH

SURFHVVLQJ�→�2UGHUV�→�&UHDWH��VSHFLDO��→�&UHDWH�UHIXUELVKPHQW.

You reach the initial screen for creating refurbishment orders.

2. Enter the necessary data.

3. Choose (17(5.

You reach the header data screen of the refurbishment order. The entry of thematerial number and the sections 4XDQWLWLHV and 5HIXUELVKPHQW are specific to thisorder.

4. In the section 4XDQWLWLHV, enter how many repairable spares in total should berefurbished for this order and choose (17(5.

The total quantity of repairable spares entered is automatically entered in the first lineof the component list of the order.

If you want to identify the repairable spares individually, choose *RWR → 2EMHFW�OLVW.You reach a dialog box in which you can enter serial numbers for the entered quantityof repairable spares to be refurbished.

• You can only call up the object list if the entry of serial numbers for thematerial was allowed your system. For this, see also the section “Structure” inRepairable Spare [Page 275].

• If it is specified in the serial number profile for the material that serial numbersPXVW be assigned, then you must specify serial numbers for the total quantityof repairable spares to be refurbished.

• If it is specified in the serial number profile for the material that serial numbersFDQ be assigned, then you have the option of only specifying serial numbersfor part of the total number of repairable spares to be refurbished.

5. To return to the header data screen, choose &RQWLQXH.

6. In the section 5HIXUELVKPHQW, enter:

– The plant and storage location from which you want to withdraw the repairablespares to be refurbished

– The plant and storage location to which the refurbished repairable spares are tobe returned

Here you can also enter the batch and valuation type if the batch managementrequirement and valuation category have been defined in the material master record.

7. If you have entered all the necessary data on the header data screen, you can enteradditional planning data for the order. To do this, proceed as for Planning in the PMOrder [Page 48].

Page 280: VeryGood PM Order

30�0DLQWHQDQFH�2UGHUV �6$3�$*

&UHDWH�5HIXUELVKPHQW�2UGHU

��� -XQH�����

The planning of sub-operations and the assignment to revisions are not intendedfor refurbishment orders.

8. Save the refurbishment order.

The total quantity of repairable spares entered in the refurbishment order is nowreserved in the specified location for this order.

9. To release the order and to implement the refurbishment of the repairable spares,proceed from step 4 of the process described in the Refurbishment of RepairableSpares [Page 276].